1

Dear Client,

Thank you for choosing Alfa Romeo.

Your Alfa 156 GTA has been designed to guarantee the safety, comfort and driving pleasure typical of Alfa Romeo.

This booklet will help you to get to know the characteristics and operation of your car.

The following pages contain all the indications necessary for you to be able to maintain the high standards of performance, quality, safety andrespect for the environment which characterize this Alfa 156 GTA.

The Warranty Booklet also contains the regulations, the warranty certificate and a guide to the services offered by Alfa Romeo.

Services which are essential and precious because, when you purchase an Alfa Romeo you are not only acquiring a car, but the tranquillity thatcomes from knowing that an efficient, willing and widespread organization is at your service for any assistance problems you may have.

What's more every single component of the Alfa 156 GTA is fully recyclable. At the end of your car’s useful lifespan any Alfa Romeodealer would be pleased to make arrangements for you car to be recycled (in compliance with current regulations in force).

Nature benefits in two ways: there’s no pollution from waste disposal, and the demand for raw materials is reduced.

Have a good trip.

This booklet describes all the versions of the Alfa 156 GTA, so you should only consider the information con-cerning the trim level, engine and version purchased by you.

2

MUST BE READ!

REFUELLING

Only refuel with unleaded petrol with octane rating (RON) not less than 95.

STARTING THE ENGINE

Engines with mechanical transmission: make sure the handbrake is pulled; put the gear lever into neutral; press theclutch pedal down to the floor without touching the accelerator, then turn the ignition key to AVV and release it as soon asthe engine starts.

Engines with Selespeed transmission: keep the brake pedal fully depressed; turn the ignition key to AVV and re-lease it as soon as the engine has started; the transmission sets to neutral automatically (the display shows position N).

PARKING OVER FLAMMABLE MATERIAL

While functioning normally, the catalytic converter reaches high temperatures. For this reason do not park the car over in-flammable material, grass, dry leaves, pine needles, etc.: fire hazard.

K

�PROTECTING THE ENVIRONMENT

A system for continuously monitoring emission system components to ensure greater environmental protection is fitted inyour car.

U

3

ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES

If, after buying the car, you decide to add electrical accessories (that will gradually drain the battery), contact Alfa Romeo Au-thorized Services. They can calculate the overall electrical requirement and check that the car’s electric system can support therequired load.�

CODE CARD

Keep the code card in a safe place, not in the car. You should always keep the electronic code written on the CODE card withyou in case you need to carry out an emergency start-up procedure.

PROGRAMMED MAINTENANCE

Correct maintenance of the car is essential for ensuring it stays in tip-top condition and safeguards its safety features, its en-vironmental friendliness and low running costs for a long time to come.

THE OWNER’S MANUAL CONTAINS…

…information, tips and important warnings regarding the safe, correct driving of your car, and its maintenance. Pay partic-ular attention to the symbols " (personal safety) # (environmental protection) â (car well-being).

4

Any queries concerning servicing should be forwarded to the showroom from which the vehicle was purchased, the subsidiary company or toour branch offices or associated companies.

Warranty Booklet

The Warranty Booklet is delivered together with every new vehicle and contains the regulations tied to the services given by Alfa Romeo Ser-vices and to the warranty conditions.

Correctly carrying out the scheduled services specified by the manufacturer is the best way to maintain the performance, safety characteristicsand low running costs of your vehicle. It is also necessary to maintain warranty cover.

“Service“ guide

This contains the Alfa Romeo Authorized Services. The services can be recognized by the presence of the Alfa Romeo badge and logo.

The Alfa Romeo organization in Italy can be found in the telephone book under the letter “A“ Alfa Romeo.

Not all the models described in this booklet are available in all countries. Only some of the fittings described in this booklet are fitted as stan-dard to the vehicle. The list of available accessories should be requested from the Alfa Romeo Dealers.

5

THE SYMBOLS USED IN THIS BOOKLET

The symbols illustrated in these pages show the subjects which should, in particular, be closely studied.

This indicates the correct procedures to be followed to prevent the vehicle from damaging theenvironment.

Warning: partially or fully ignoring these rules may lead to serious injury.

Warning: partially or fully ignoring theserules may lead to serious damagebeing caused to the vehicle which, in somecircumstances, may cause forfeiture of thewarranty cover.

PERSONALSAFETY

PROTECTING THEENVIRONMENT

VEHICLESAFETY

The texts, illustrations and specifications given in this booklet refer to the vehicle at the time of going to press.

As part of our ongoing striving to improve our products, Alfa Romeo may introduce technical changes during production, thereforethe specifications and fittings may be altered without prior notice.

For details on this subject, please apply to the manufacturer’s sales network.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

6

ALFA ROMEO CODE SYSTEM

To increase protection against attemptedtheft, the car is fitted with an electronic en-gine lock system (Alfa Romeo CODE) whichis activated automatically when the ignitionkey is removed. In fact the grip of each keycontains an electronic device which modulatesthe radio frequency signal transmitted whenthe engine is started by a special aerial in-corporated in the ignition switch. This modu-lated signal is the “password“ by which thecontrol unit recognises the key and only inthis condition can the engine be started.

THE KEYS

The car is delivered with two keys, key(A-fig.1) with metal insert and remotecontrol function and another key with met-al insert only, without remote control.

The key remote control operates:

– door centralised opening/locking

– opening luggage compartment boot/tailgate

– activation/deactivation of electronicalarm (if existing)

GGEETTTTIINNGG TTOO KKNNOOWW YYOOUURR CCAARR

SYMBOLS

Special coloured labels have been attachednear to or actually on some of the compo-nents making up your Alfa 156 GTA.These labels bear symbols that remind youof the precautions to be taken as regardsthat particular component.

fig. 1

A0B0016m

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

7

Key metal insert operates:

– the ignition switch

– the driver's door lock and, optional forversions/markets where applicable, the pas-senger's door lock

– glove box lock

– passenger’s side Air bag deactivation.

IMPORTANT In order to ensure perfectefficiency of the electronic devices containedinside the keys, they should never be directlyexposed to the rays of the sun.

If the car changes owner,the new owner must begiven all the keys and the

CODE card.

fig. 2

A0B0010m

The CODE card (fig. 2) is also suppliedwith the key and it contains the codes of thekeys (both the mechanical one and the elec-tronic one for emergency starting).

The code numbers on the CODE card mustbe kept in a safe place, not in the car.

The driver should always keep the elec-tronic code given on the CODE card with himin the event of having to carry out emer-gency starting.

KEY WITH REMOTE CONTROL

The key is fitted with (fig. 3):– a metal insert (A) that can be enclosed

in the key grip– button (B) for remote opening/clos-

ing of the doors and turning the electronicalarm on/off (where fitted)

– a button (C) for remote boot unlock-ing

– removable hook ring (D)– a button (E) for power-assisted opening

of the metal insert.

fig. 3

A0B9000m

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

8

To insert the metallic insert in the key grip,press the button (E-fig. 3) to release theinsert and turn it in the direction of the ar-row until it clicks.

To open/close the doors by remote con-trol, press button (B). On cars fitted withelectronic alarm system, pressing button (B)also turns the electronic alarm .

IMPORTANT Certain radio devices out-side the car (e.g. mobile phones, HAM ra-dio systems) could disturb the remote con-trol frequency. In this case the remote controlcould malfunction.

OPENING THE BOOT

The boot can be opened by remote controlfrom outside pressing button (C-fig. 3),also when the electronic alarm is on.

In this case the alarm system switches offthe boot volumetric protection and controlsensor, the system gives two “beeps“ (withthe exceptions of versions for certain mar-kets) and the direction indicators light up forabout three seconds.

Closing the boot again, the control func-tions are restored, the system gives two“beeps“ (with the exceptions of versions forcertain markets) and the direction indicatorslight up for about three seconds.

The metallic insert (A) of the key operates:– the ignition switch– the driver's door lock and, optional for

versions/markets where applicable, the pas-senger's door lock

– the glovebox lock– passenger’s Air bag deactivation.

To move the metallic insert out of the keygrip, press button (E).

When button (E) ispressed, take the utmost

care to prevent the metal insertfrom causing injury or damagewhen it comes out. Button (E) mustonly be pressed when the key isaway from the body, in particularthe eyes, and from objects thatcould be spoilt (e.g. clothes). Nev-er leave the key unattended to pre-vent anyone, especially children,from holding it and pressing button(E) inadvertently.

WARNING

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

9

OPERATION (fig. 4)

Each time the ignition key is turned toSTOP position, the Alfa Romeo CODE sys-tem deactivates the functions of the engineelectronic control unit.

Each time the engine is started, turning thekey to the MAR, position, the control unitof the Alfa Romeo CODE system sends arecognition code to the engine control unitto deactivate the inhibition of the functions.The recognition code, which is crypted andvariable between over 4 billion combina-tions, is only sent if the system control unithas recognised the code sent to it by thekey, which contains an electronic transmit-ter, through an aerial in the ignition switch.

This condition is indicated by a brief flashof the warning light (A) on the check pan-el.

If the code has not been recognised cor-rectly, the warning light (A) stays on to-gether with the warning light (B).

In this case, you are recommended to re-turn the key to the STOP position and thenback to MAR; if the inhibition persists, tryagain possibly with the other key providedwith the car. If it is still impossible to startthe car carry out the emergency starting pro-cedure described in section “In an emer-gency“ and turn to an Alfa Romeo Autho-rized Service.

IMPORTANT Every electronic key hasits own code, which must be memorisedby the system control unit. To memorise newkeys, up to a maximum of eight, apply sole-ly to Alfa Romeo Authorized Services takingwith you all the keys in your possession, theCODE card, a personal identity documentand the car’s possession documents.

The codes of the keys notprovided during the newmemorising procedure are

erased from the memory. This is toensure that any lost or stolen keyscan no longer be used to start thecar.

fig. 4

A0B0021m

IMPORTANT The Alfa Romeo CODE(¢) warning light comes on when travel-ling with the ignition key on MAR:

1) If the warning lamp lights up while thecar is moving, it means that the system isrunning a self-diagnosis (e.g. due to a volt-age drop). The first time you stop you cantest the system as follows: switch the en-gine off by turning the ignition key toSTOP; then turn the key back to MAR:the warning lamp will light up and shouldgo out in the space of about one second. Ifthe warning lamp fails to go out, leave thekey at STOP for more than 30 seconds andrepeat the procedure described previously.If the problem persists, contact your AlfaRomeo Authorized Service.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

10

2) If the warning lamp flashes it meansthat the car is not protected by the immo-biliser. Contact your Alfa Romeo AuthorizedService immediately and get them to storethe codes of all the keys in the memory.

CHANGING THE BATTERY OF THE KEYWITH REMOTE CONTROL

If when pressing button (B or C-fig. 5)the control is rejected or is not performed,the battery should be replaced by a new oneof the same type to be found c/o normalretailers. On versions fitted with electronicalarm, the need to replace the remote con-trol battery is indicated by the coming on,with fixed light, of the deterrent led (A-fig.6) set on the dashboard near the central airvent.

If after 2 seconds withthe key in the MAR posi-tion, the warning light turn

on again flashing, this means thatthe code of the keys has not beenmemorised, thus the car is not pro-tected by the Alfa Romeo CODEsystem against attempted theft. Inthis case, contact an Alfa RomeoAuthorized Service to have the keycodes memorised.

IMPORTANT The system is protectedby a 10A fuse housed in the fuse-holder setunder the dashboard (see paragraph “If afuse blows“ in “In an emergency“ chapter).

Dead batteries are harm-ful for the environment.They must be disposed of

in special containers as specified bycurrent regulations. Avoid expo-sure to naked flames and high tem-peratures. Keep out of reach ofchildren.

fig. 5

A0B9000m

fig. 6

A0B0011m

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

11

To change the battery (fig. 7):– move the metal insert (A) to the un-

locking position;– turn the pin (B), taking the reference

mark (dot) of the cut to the UNLOCK po-sition (2);

– working on the notch (C) remove thebattery holder (D);

– change the battery (E) putting it in theposition shown on the holder;

– insert the holder back in the key andlock it, turning the reference mark of the pin(B) to the LOCK position (1).

ELECTRONIC ALARM

DESCRIPTION

The system comprises: transmitter, re-ceiver, control unit with siren and volumet-ric sensors and anti-lift sensor. The electronicalarm is controlled by a receiver inside thecar and it is turned on and off through theremote control incorporated in the key whichsends the crypted and variable code. Theelectronic alarm monitors: unlawful openingof the doors, bonnet and boot (perimetralprotection), operation of the ignition key,battery and emergency key cable cutting,the presence of moving bodies (volumetricprotection), any abnormal raising/slopingof the car and operates the central door lock-ing system. It also makes it possible to cutoff the volumetric protection.

IMPORTANT The engine inhibitor func-tion is guaranteed by the Alfa Romeo CODEsystem which is activated automaticallywhen the ignition key is removed.

fig. 7

A0B0047m

REMOTE CONTROL (fig. 8)

The remote control is built into the key andit is fitted with a button for activating thealarm (B-fig. 8).

fig. 8

A0B9000m

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

12

REQUEST FOR ADDITIONAL KEYS WITH REMOTE CONTROL

The receiver can recognise up to 5 keyswith remote control. If during the life of thecar a new key with remote control is need-ed for any reason whatsoever, contact AlfaRomeo Authorized Services directly, takingwith you the CODE card, a personal identi-ty document and the car’s possession doc-uments.

ACTIVATING THE ALARM

When the doors and boot/bonnet lids areclosed and the ignition key is in the STOPor PARK position (key removed), point theremote control towards the car and thenpress and release the button (B-fig. 8).

With the exception of some markets thesystem sounds a beep and the door lock isengaged.

Engagement of the alarm is preceded bya self-diagnosis phase characterised by achange in the frequency at which the de-terrent led (A-fig. 9) on the dashboardflashes. If an anomaly is detected the sys-tem gives off a further beep.

Surveillance

When the system has been turned on, theled (A-fig. 9) on the dashboard will flashto indicate that the system is in the surveil-lance mode. The led will flash continuouslywhile the system is under surveillance.

IMPORTANT Operation of the electronicalarm is adapted at the origin to the regu-lations of the different countries.

Self-diagnosis and monitoringof doors and bonnet/boot

If, after the alarm has been activated, asecond acoustic signal is heard, check thatall the doors and bonnet/boot are closedproperly and engage the system once again.

On the other if a door or bonnet/boot lidis not correctly closed it will not be controlledby the system.

If the control signal is repeated when thedoors and bonnet/boot are closed proper-ly this means that the self-diagnosis functionhas detected a system operating fault, inwhich case it is necessary to contact AlfaRomeo Authorized Services.

fig. 9

A0B0011m

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

13

DEACTIVATING THE ALARM

To deactivate the alarm, press the buttonon the key with remote control. The systemperforms the following (with the exceptionof some markets):

– the direction indicators turn on twicebriefly

– two beeps are sounded briefly by thesiren

– the doors are released.

IMPORTANT If the led (A-fig. 9) inthe car stays on when the system has beendeactivated, (maximum of 2 minutes or un-til the ignition key is moved to MAR) thefollowing should be borne in mind:

– if the led stays on permanently, it meansthat the remote control batteries are flat andneed replacing;

– if the led continues to flash, but at dif-ferent intervals than normal, it means thatattempts to steal the car have been made,counting the number of flashes it is also pos-sible to identify the type of attempt:

1 flash: right front door

2 flashes: left front door

3 flashes: right rear door

4 flashes: left rear door

5 flashes: volumetric sensors

6 flashes: bonnet

7 flashes: boot

8 flashes: tampering with car startingcables

9 flashes: tampering with battery orcutting emergency key ca-bles

10 flashes: at least three causes ofalarm.

AUTOMATIC ENGAGEMENTOF THE ALARM (optional for versions/marketswhere applicable)

If the alarm has not been engaged withthe remote control it will come on auto-matically after an established time of 30seconds from the moment that the ignitionkey has been turned to the STOP orPARK positions and a door or the boot hasbeen opened and then closed again. Thiscondition is shown by the intermittent illu-mination of the led in the car and by the sig-nalling described previously.

To deactivate the alarm press the buttonon the remote control.

The alarm is also automatically engagedwhen the doors are closed using the key.

When the alarm is engaged automatical-ly the doors are not locked.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

14

WHEN THE ALARMIS TRIGGERED

When the alarm is engaged it will soundwhen:

– one of the doors, the bonnet or the tail-gate is opened;

– the battery is disconnected or the elec-tric cables are cut, or the emergency key ca-bles are cut;

– intrusion into the passenger compart-ment, e.g. window being broken (volumetricprotection);

– attempt to start the engine (key atMAR);

– abnormal car raising/sloping.

Depending on the markets, the triggeringof the alarm will activate the siren and thehazard warning lights (for about 26 sec-onds). The methods of operation and thenumber of cycles may vary depending onthe versions/markets.

However a maximum number of cycles isforeseen.

Once the alarm cycle has come to an end,the system will return to its normal moni-toring state.

INTERRUPTING THE ALARM

To interrupt the alarm press the button onthe remote control or, if the remote controlbattery is down, get into the car, insert thekey into the ignition switch and turn the keyto MAR.

IMPORTANT If it is necessary for thevehicle to lie inactive for long periods (over3 weeks), close the vehicle using the keyto deactivate the alarm.

VOLUMETRIC PROTECTION

To guarantee correct operation all the win-dows and the sunroof, if any, should beclosed.

This function can be excluded (for exam-ple when leaving animals on-board the car)by performing the following operations inquick succession: when the key is at MAR,move the key to the STOP position andthen return the key to MAR and then onceagain to the STOP position. Remove theignition key.

The led in the car will come on for about2 seconds to confirm that the function hasbeen excluded.

To restore volumetric protection move theignition key to the MAR position and holdit in this position for more than 30 seconds.

If requiring to activate an electric controloperated by the ignition key at MAR (e.g.electric windows) with the volumetric pro-tection deactivated, turn the ignition keyto MAR, operate the control and return thekey to STOP within a maximum time of30 seconds. This way volumetric protectionis not restored.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

15

CUTTING OUT OPERATIONOF THE SIREN (for versions/markets where applicable)

When requiring to dispense with the sirenacoustic signalling in the alarm condition, sim-ply keep the remote control button (B-fig. 10) pressed for 4 seconds when en-gaging the system.

This condition is shown by a series of 5beeps in quick succession after the normalacoustic/visual signals when the system isoperated.

The next time the system is activated, nor-mal operation of the siren is restored auto-matically.

MINISTERIALHOMOLOGATION

In keeping with the laws in force in eachcountry on the subject of radio frequency,we point out that:

– the separate homologation numbers foreach market are given on the last pages ofthis handbook before the alphabetical index(for some countries also homologation doc-ument);

– for markets in which the transmitterneeds to be marked with the homologationnumber, this has been stated on the com-ponent.

(Depending on the versions/markets, thecode may also be marked on the transmit-ter and/or on the receiver).

REMOTE CONTROLDOOR LOCKING SYSTEM

The system comprises a receiver inside thecar and a transmitter (remote control) in-corporated in the key.

To lock/unlock the locks, point the trans-mitter towards the car, press and releasethe button (B-fig. 11).

IMPORTANT Should it be necessary toprogramme additional remote controls, con-tact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

fig. 10

A0B9000m

fig. 11

A0B9000m

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

16

IGNITION DEVICE

THE SWITCH (fig. 12)

The key can be moved to one of four po-sitions:

– STOP: engine switched off, key can beremoved, engine lock engaged, steering lockengaged, all services excluded apart fromthose powered directly (e.g. hazard warn-ing lights).

– MAR: drive position. The engine lockis deactivated and all electrical devices arepowered.

IMPORTANT Never leave the key in thisposition when the engine is stationary.

– AVV: unstable position for starting theengine.

IMPORTANT If the engine does notstart, return the ignition key to the STOPposition and repeat the sequence.

The ignition block is fitted with a safety de-vice preventing it from being moved to theAVV position when the engine is alreadyrunning.

– PARK: engine switched off, key canbe removed, engine lock engaged, steer-ing lock engaged, sidelights automaticallyswitched on.

IMPORTANT To turn the key to thePARK position, button (A) located on theswitch should be pressed first.

fig. 12

A0B0020m

If the ignition device istampered with (for exam-ple during an attempted

break-in) have it checked over byAlfa Romeo Authorized Services,before travelling again.

When leaving the car al-ways remove the key from

the ignition to prevent any pas-senger in the car from inadver-tently activating the controls. Nev-er leave children unattended in thecar. Remember to engage the hand-brake and if the car is facing uphill,first gear and if the car is facingdownhill, reverse.

WARNING

STEERING LOCK

Engaging lock:

– move the ignition key to the STOP orPARK position and remove the key light-ly turning the steering wheel to facilitate thelocking action.

Releasing the lock:

– turn the key to the MAR position andgently rock the steering wheel.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

17

DOORS Rear doors

– To open the door, only with the innerknob (A-fig. 14) raised, pull the open-ing handle (A-fig. 15).

– To close, press the button (A-fig. 14)also with the door open, then close the door.

OPENING/CLOSINGFROM OUTSIDE

Front doors

– To open the driver's door turn the keyclockwise and to open the passengers' door,optional for versions/markets where ap-plicable, turn the key anti-clockwise, thenremove the key and press the button (A-fig. 13).

– To close the door, turn the key in the op-posite direction.

fig. 13

A0B0023m

fig. 14

A0B0369m

Never remove the keywith the car on the move.

The steering wheel would lock au-tomatically the first time the steer-ing wheel is turned. This also oc-curs if the car is towed.

WARNING

Before opening a door,ensure that this can be

done safely.

WARNING

It is absolutely forbiddento carry out whatever af-

ter-market operation involvingsteering system or steering columnmodifications (e.g.: installation ofanti-theft device) that could badlyaffect performance and safety, cau-se the lapse of warranty and alsoresult in non-compliance of the carwith homologation requirements.

WARNING

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

18

OPENING/CLOSINGFROM INSIDE

Front doors

– To open the door pull the handle (A-fig. 16) regardless of the position of knob(B).

– To close the door pull the flap. To pre-vent the door from being opened from out-side press knob (B).

Rear doors CENTRALIZED LOCKING

This permits centralized locking of alldoors, both front and rear.

To operate the centralized locking devicethe doors must be perfectly closed otherwisethe system will not work.

For versions/markets, where applicable,central locking depends on the completeclosing of all the doors and of the boot.

– From outside: when the doors areclosed, insert and turn the key in the lock ofone of the two front doors.

fig. 15

A0B0025m

fig. 16

A0B0024m

fig. 17

A0B0026m

– To open the door pull handle (A-fig. 17).

– To close the door press the knob (B)even when the flap is open, and then closethe flap.

Incorrect closing of one or more doors willturn on the symbol ́ together with the rel-evant message on the Infocenter display.

The rear doors can onlybe opened if the child safe-

ty lock has been released.

WARNING

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

19

CHILD SAFETY LOCK

The rear doors are equipped with a specialdevice (fig. 18) which prevents the doorbeing opened from inside.

IMPORTANT Each device only acts onthe door on which it is installed.

The device can only be engaged with thedoors open, raising or lowering the controlwith the ignition key:

position 1 (control up) – device en-gaged (door locked);

position 2 (control down) – device re-leased (door can be opened from inside).

fig. 18

A0B0027m

– From inside: when the doors areclosed, press one of the knobs (B-fig. 16)located on the front doors, engage/releasethe centralized locking system.

By pressing the knob (B-fig. 17) on oneof the rear doors only that particular doorwill be locked.

IMPORTANT For the front doors it is notpossible to keep the knob (B-fig. 16)down if the door has not been shut proper-ly.

IMPORTANT The centralized lockingsystem can be deactivated, thus unlockingall doors, by lifting the door opening leveron one of the two front doors. If the powersupply is interrupted (burnt fuse, battery dis-connected, etc.) each door can be openedmanually from both inside and outside thecar.

IMPORTANT The intervention of the in-ertial fuel cut-off switch causes the automaticdoor unlock and inhibits door locking forabout 30 seconds. After this time, door lock-ing control unit operation is restored.

Always use this devicewhen carrying children.

WARNING

After activating the safe-ty device check that it is

working correctly by pulling on theinner lever used to open the door.

WARNING

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

20

FRONT SEATS MOVING THE SEATSBACKWARDS OR FORWARDS

Lift lever (A) and push the seat backwardsor forwards: in the driving position the armsshould be slightly flexed and hands shouldrest on the rim of the steering wheel.

ADJUSTING THE HEIGHT OF THE DRIVER’S SEAT

To raise the seat, pull the lever (B) tak-ing it upwards, then continue operating thelever (up and down) until reaching the re-quired height, then release the lever. To low-er the seat, push the lever (B) downwards,then operate the lever (up and down) untilreaching the height required.

IMPORTANT Adjustment must only becarried out when seated in the driver’s seat.

ADJUSTING THE ANGLE OF THE BACKREST

Adjustment is of the electric type; use but-ton (D) on the outer side of the seat to setthe backrest in the required position.

LUMBAR ADJUSTMENT OF THE DRIVER’S SEAT(optional for versions/marketswhere applicable)

Adjustment is done by turning the knob(E) until reaching the most comfortable po-sition.

Fig. 19: sporty seats and lateral air bags.

fig. 19

A0B0406m

Adjustments may bemade solely with the car

stationary.

WARNING

Once you have let go offthe lever, check that the

seat is firmly locked in the runnersby trying to move it back andforth. If the seat is not locked prop-erly, in the case of collision it mightmove unexpectedly with clearlydangerous consequences.

WARNING

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

21

SEAT WARMING (fig. 20)

The seat warming pad can be switched onand off using switch (F) on the outer sideof the seat.

When the function is “on” the led on key(F) and the pilot lamp (G) are lit.

REAR POCKETS (fig. 21)

The front seats are provided with a pock-et in the rear of the seat back.

REAR SEAT

CENTRE ARMREST (fig. 22)

To use the centre armrest, lower it holdingthe grip (A) as illustrated.

fig. 20

A0B0405m

fig. 21

A0B0311m

fig. 23

A0B0321m

fig. 22

A0B0313m

SKI COMPARTMENT (optional for versions/markets where applicable)

This compartment can be used for carry-ing long loads.

To gain access to this compartment, low-er the armrest, pull the grip (A-fig. 23)of the lid and lower it onto the armrest (fig.24).

fig. 24

A0B0453m

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

22

STEERING WHEEL ADJUSTMENT

The steering wheel position is adjustableand may be move nearer to or further awayfrom the driver and also raised or lowered.

To do this, it is necessary to release lever(A-fig. 28) and pull it towards the steer-ing wheel.

After setting the steering wheel in the mostappropriate position, lock it pushing the leverfully home.

fig. 28

A0B0035m

The compartment can be extended by re-moving the armrest: with the armrest low-ered, press the two small handles (B-fig. 25) at the base of the armrest inwardsand remove it. Then pull the grip of the lidand lower it onto the rear seat (fig. 26).

HEADREST

The car is fitted with two headrests for theside seats.

If necessary the headrests can be removedas follows:

– raise the headrest to the maximumheight;

– press both buttons (A and B-fig. 27)and remove the headrests.

fig. 25

A0B00323m

fig. 26

A0B0324m

fig. 27

A0B0296m

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

23

ADJUSTING THE REAR-VIEW MIRRORS

INTERNALREAR-VIEW MIRROR

The mirror, fitted with a safety devicewhich releases it in the event of a violentimpact can be moved to two positions: nor-mal or anti-glare by operating lever (A-fig.29).

DOOR MIRRORS

Electrically adjustable (fig. 30)

– Select the mirror to be adjusted (rightor left) using switch (A):

– move switch (A) to (B) to adjust theleft door mirror.

Move switch (A) to (D) to adjust the rightdoor mirror.

– Then, reposition the switch (A) in theintermediate locking position (C).

IMPORTANT The mirror can only be ad-justed electrically when the ignition key isin the MAR position.

fig. 29

A0B0022m

fig. 30

A0B0284m

The steering wheel posi-tion must only be adjusted

with the car stationary.

WARNING

It is absolutely forbiddento carry out whatever af-

ter-market operation involvingsteering system or steering columnmodifications (e.g.: installation ofanti-theft device) that could badlyaffect performance and safety, cau-se the lapse of warranty and alsoresult in non-compliance of the carwith homologation requirements.

WARNING

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

24

Folding (fig. 31)

– If necessary (for example when the sizeof the mirror causes difficulty in narrowspaces) the door mirror can be folded in to-wards the car from position (A) to position(B).

Defrosting/demisting (fig. 32)

The electric mirrors can be fitted with heat-ing coils which are operated together withrearscreen heating pressing button (A) andprevent the mirrors from frosting and/ormisting.

IMPORTANT This function is timed andis deactivated after a few minutes.

POWER WINDOWS

FRONT

IMPORTANT With ignition key atSTOP windows can be opened manuallyfor about max. 2 minutes or until openingone of the front doors.

fig. 32

A0B0399m

fig. 31

A0B0370m

When travelling the doormirrors must always be in

position (A).

WARNING

As the driver’s door mir-ror is curved, it may slight-

ly alter the perception of distance.

WARNING

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

25

Driver’s (fig. 33-35)

The driver’s door panel plate contains thebuttons which, with the ignition key atMAR, operate the following windows:

A – left front window

B – right front window

C – left rear window (where fitted)

D – right rear window (where fitted)

E – rear door window control inhibitor(where fitted) (with the inhibitor activatedthe button is up, press again to re-enablethe rear buttons).

IMPORTANT The driver’s power windowis fitted with a “continuous automatic oper-ation“ for both lowering and raising the win-dow device. A brief press on the upper orlower part of the button will cause the win-dow to move and continue its stroke auto-matically: the window stops in the positionrequired by pressing either the upper or low-er part of the button again.

Passenger’s (fig. 34)

Button (A) is used to operate the pas-senger’s window.

IMPORTANT The passenger’s windowis fitted with a device for “continuous au-tomatic operation“ only for lowering it. Thedevice works as described for the driver’swindow.

REAR

The rear doors are fitted with power win-dows with split controls on driver’s door (Cand D-fig. 35) and on each rear door (A-fig. 36).

fig. 33

A0B0031m

fig. 34

A0B0032m

fig. 35

A0B0033m

fig. 36

A0B0034m

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

26

To unfasten the seat belts, press button(C). Guide the seat belt with your handwhile it is rewinding, to prevent it from twist-ing.

Through the reel, the belt automaticallyadapts to the body of the passenger wear-ing it, allowing freedom of movement.

When the car is parked on a steep slopethe reel mechanism may block; this is nor-mal. The reel mechanism prevents the web-bing coming out when it is jerked or if thecar brakes sharply, in a collision or when cor-nering at high speed.

With the ignition key at MAR, press thebutton to lower the window; pull the buttonto raise it.

Do not hold the buttondown when the window isfully open or fully closed.

SEAT BELTS

USING THE SEAT BELTS

The belt should be worn keeping the cheststraight and rested against the seat back.

Take hold the tongue (A-fig. 37) and in-sert it into the buckle (B), until hearing thelocking click.

At removal, if it jams, let it rewind for ashort stretch, then pull it out again withoutjerking.

fig. 37

A0B0325m

fig. 38

A0B0300m

Never press button (C)when travelling.

WARNING

When leaving the car al-ways remove the ignition

key to prevent passengers (espe-cially children) from being injuredby the power windows inadver-tently operated.

WARNING

Incorrect use of the pow-er windows can be dan-

gerous. Before and during opera-tion of them always make surethat the passengers are not ex-posed to the risk of harm causedeither directly by the windows inmotion or by personal objectsdrawn or knocked by them.

WARNING

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

27

The rear seat is fitted with inertial seat beltswith three anchor points with reel for theside seats and an abdominal belt with twoanchor points for the centre (A-fig. 38)seat. On request for versions/marketswhere applicable, the centre seat, too, maybe fitted with a headrest and inertial beltwith three anchor points with reel like thetwo sides (fig. 40).

In order to ensure that the correct tabs, arefitted in the correct clips, the tabs of the sidebelts and the clip of the central belt (onlyabdominal) are incompatible (fig. 39).

fig. 39

A0B0466m

fig. 40

A0B0301m

fig. 41

A0B0467m

fig. 42

A0B0123m

To offer the highest levelof protection, the rear seat

belts should be fastened as shownin fig. 38 and fig. 40.

WARNING

Make sure the seat back iscorrectly hooked on both

sides (not visible red buttons (A) toprevent seat back being thrownforwards and injuring passengersshould you brake sharply.

WARNING

Proper backrest coupling isguaranteed when button

(A-fig. 42) set near each handle (B)is retracted in the handle.

WARNING

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

28

When the rear seats are not occupied, usethe proper pockets (A-fig. 43) on thebackrest to stow the seat belt clips neatly,the tab (B) of the central abdominal beltshall be fitted into (C) (see next paragraph“Rear abdominal centre belt housing”).

REAR CENTRAL ABDOMINAL BELT (fig. 44)

Fasten the belt by inserting the tab (A) in-to the clip (B), until a click is heard.

To adjust the belt, run the tape in the buck-le (D) pulling the end (E) to tighten andpart (F) to loosen.

Press button (C) to release the belt.

IMPORTANT The belt is adjusted prop-erly when it fits closely across the hips.

REAR ABDOMINAL CENTREBELT HOUSING (fig. 45)

When the rear centre belt, which is of theabdominal type, is not in use, hook thetongue (A) in the special support (B) onthe rear seat back.

fig. 43

A0B0118m

fig. 44

A0B0003m

fig. 45

A0B0468m

Always hook the belt tipwhen it is not used to pre-

vent it from hitting the occupantsin the event of a crash.

WARNING

Remember that, in theevent of an accident, any

passengers occupying the rearseats who are not wearing a seatbelt not only subject themselves togreat personal risk but constitutea danger to the occupants of thefront seats.

WARNING

After tilting, when resettingthe rear seat in straight po-

sition, take care to reposition theseat belt properly to have it readyfor use.

WARNING

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

29

ADJUSTING THE HEIGHT OF FRONT AND REAR SIDESEAT BELTS (Sportwagon versions only)

Always adjust the height of belts adaptingthem to the size of the person wearing them.This precaution will improve their effective-ness, substantially reducing the risk of injuryin the event of a crash.

Correct adjustment is obtained when thebelt passes about half way between the endof the shoulder and the neck.

To adjust the belt, use handle (A-fig. 46)(front seat belts) or (A- fig. 47) (rear sidebelts, Sportwagon versions only) as shownby the arrow and raise or lower the rockerring (B) to the most suitable of the possi-ble positions. After adjusting, release handle(A).

fig. 45

A0B0029m

fig. 46

A0B0099m

After adjustment, alwayscheck that the slider (B) is

anchored in one of the positionsprovided. To do this, with the but-ton (A-fig. 46) or (A-fig. 47) re-leased, exert a further pressure toallow the anchor device to catch ifrelease did not take place at one ofthe preset positions.

WARNING

Make the height adjust-ment when the car is sta-

tionary.

WARNING

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

30

IMPORTANT The pretensioner will givemaximum protection when the seat belt ad-heres snugly to wearer’s chest and hips.

Front seat pretensioners activate only iffront seat belts are properly fitted into buck-les.

A small amount of smoke may be pro-duced. This smoke is in no way toxic andpresents no fire hazard.

The emergency tensioning retractor needsno maintenance or lubrication. Any modifi-cation to its original features will nullify theretractor’s effectiveness. If, due to unusualnatural events (floods, high waves, etc.),the device has been affected by water andmud, it must be replaced. Operations involving

banging, vibrations orheating (above 100°C for

a maximum of 6 hours) in the areaof the pretensioners may damageor trigger off the device. Vibrationsfrom rough road surfaces or acci-dental jolting caused by mountingpavements etc. do not have any ef-fect on the pretensioner. If, how-ever, you need assistance, go to Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

PRE-TENSIONING DEVICES

To increase the efficiency of the front seatbelts, Alfa 156 GTA is fitted with pre-tensioning devices.

These devices “feel” that the car is beingsubject to a violent impact by way of a sen-sor rewind the seat belts a few centimetres.In this way they ensure that the seat beltadheres to the wearer before the restrainingaction begins.

The seat belt locks to indicate that the de-vice has intervened; the seat belt cannot bedrawn back up even when guiding it man-ually.

The pretensioner can onlybe used once. After a col-

lision that has triggered it, have itreplaced at Alfa Romeo AuthorizedService. The validity of the deviceis written on the plate located onthe front left door near the lock.Contact Alfa Romeo AuthorizedServices to have pretensioner re-placed as this date approaches.

WARNING

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

31

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE USE OF THE SEAT BELTS

All the occupants of the car are obliged torespect the local traffic laws regarding thewearing of seat belts.

Always fasten the seat belts before start-ing.

fig. 48

A0B0004m

Never disassemble ortamper with the preten-

sioner components. All interven-tions must be carried out by qual-ified and authorised personnel.Always contact Alfa Romeo Au-thorized Services.

WARNING

The seat belt must not betwisted and should cling

tightly to the body. The upper partmust pass over the shoulder anddiagonally across the chest. Thelower part must rest across thepelvis and not across the stomachto eliminate the risk of sliding for-wards (fig. 48). Do not use devices(clips, stoppers, etc.) which keepthe belts away from the body.

WARNING

To ensure the highest de-gree of protection, you are

recommended to keep the seatbackrest in the straightest positionpossible, and the belt adhering wellto the chest and pelvis.Seat belt should always be wornin both the front and rear positions!Travelling without seat belt in-creases the risk of serious injury ordeath in the case of accident.

WARNINGUnder no circumstances

should the components ofthe seat belts and pretensioner betampered with or removed. Anyoperation should be carried out byqualified and authorised personnel.Always contact an Alfa Romeo Au-thorized Service.

WARNING

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

32

Seat belts are also to be worn by expec-tant mothers: the risk of injury in the caseof accident is greatly reduced for them andthe unborn child if they are wearing a seatbelt.

Pregnant women must of course positionthe lower part of the belt very low downso that it passes under the abdomen (fig.50).

HOW TO KEEP THE SEAT BELTSALWAYS IN EFFICIENTCONDITIONS

– Always use the belts with the tape welltaut and never twisted; make sure that itis free to run without impediments.

– After a serious accident, replace the beltbeing worn at that time, even if it does notappear damaged. Always replace the seatbelts if pretensioners have been activated.

– To clean the belts, wash by hand withneutral soap, rinse and leave to dry in theshade. Never use strong detergents, bleachor dyes or any other chemical substance thatmight weaken the fibres.

– Prevent the reels from getting wet: cor-rect operation of them is only guaranteedif water does not get inside.

– Replace the seat belt if it shows signif-icant wear or cut signs.

fig. 49

A0B0007m

fig. 50

A0B0008m

If the seat belt has beensubjected to shock, for ex-

ample during an accident, it mustbe completely replaced togetherwith the attachments and theirscrews, and the pretensioning de-vices, even if visible defects are notdetected as the belt may have lostits resilience.

WARNING

Do not carry children onyour knee using a single

seat belt for both (fig. 49). Do notfasten other objects to the body.

WARNING

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

33

CARRYING CHILDREN SAFELY For the best level of protection in the eventof a crash, all occupants must travel seatedand secured by suitable restraint systems.

This is even more important for children.

According to 2003/20/EC Directive, thisprescription is compulsory for all EuropeanCommunity countries.

Compared with adults, a child’s head isproportionately larger and heavier than therest of the body, while muscles and bonestructure are not completely developed.Therefore, in order to restraint them correctlyin the event of a crash, different systems areneeded then adult seat belts.

fig. 51

A0B0001m

SERIOUS DANGER! Never place cradle child’s seats on thefront passenger seats of cars equipped with passenger air

bag since the air bag activation could cause serious injuries, even mortal.You are advised to carry children always on the rear seat, as this is themost protected position in the case of a crash. In any case, child’s seatsmust absolutely not be positioned on the front seat of car’s with passen-ger’s air bag, which during inflation could cause serious injury, even mor-tal, regardless of the seriousness of the crash that triggered it. Childrenmay placed on the front seat of cars fitted with passenger’s air bag deac-tivation. In this case, it is absolutely necessary to check the warning lightF on the check panel to make sure that deactivation has actually tookplace (see paragraph “Front and side air bags“ at item “Front passengerair bag“). The front passenger seat shall be adjusted in the most backwardposition to prevent any contact between the child’s seat and the dashboard.

WARNING

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

34

The results of research on the best pro-tection for a child are summarised in Euro-pean Standard ECE-R44, which in additionto making them compulsory, subdivides re-straint systems into five groups:

Group 0 until 10 kg in weight

Group 0+ until 13 kg in weight

Group 1 9-18 kg in weight

Group 2 15-25 kg in weight

Group 3 22-36 kg in weight

As it may be noted, the groups partiallyoverlap and in fact, in commerce it is pos-sible to find devices that cover more thanone weight group (fig. 52).

All the restraint devices must bear the ho-mologation data, together with the controlbrand, on a solidly fixed label which mustabsolutely not be removed.

Over 1.50 m in height, from the point ofview of restraint systems, children are con-sidered as adults and wear belts normally.

The Lineaccessori Alfa Romeo includesseats for each weight group, which are therecommended choice because they havebeen designed and specifically experiment-ed for Alfa Romeo cars.

GROUP 0 and 0+

Babies up to 13 kg must be carried fac-ing behind (fig. 52) on a cradle seat,which, supporting the head, does not inducestrain on the neck in the event of sharp de-celeration.

The cradle is restrained by the car safetybelts, as illustrated, and it should in turnrestrain the child with the belts incorporat-ed on it.

fig. 52

A0B0005m

GROUP 1

Starting from 9 kg to 18 kg in weight, chil-dren may be carried facing forwards withseats fitted with front cushion (fig. 53),through which the car seat belt restrains bothchild and seat.

fig. 53

A0B0006m

The illustration is indica-tive only for assembly. As-

semble the seat according to thecompulsory instructions providedwith it.

WARNINGThe illustration is indica-

tive only for assembly. As-semble the seat according to thecompulsory instructions providedwith it.

WARNING

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

35

GROUP 3

For children from 22 kg up to 36 kg thechild’s chest is thick enough not to need thespacer back rest any more.

Fig. 55 shows proper child seat posi-tioning on the rear seat.

Over 1.50 m tall children may wear seatbelts like adults.

GROUP 2

Starting from 15 to 25 kg in weight, chil-dren may be restrained directly by the carseat belts. Child seats only have the func-tion of positioning the child correctly in re-lation to the belts, so that the diagonal partadheres to the chest and never to the neckand that the horizontal part adheres to thechild’s pelvis and not to the abdomen (fig.54).

fig. 54

A0B0002m

fig. 55

A0B0009m

The illustration is indica-tive only for assembly. As-

semble the seat according to thecompulsory instructions providedwith it.

WARNINGThe illustration is indica-

tive only for assembly. As-semble the seat according to thecompulsory instructions providedwith it.

WARNING

Seats exist which are suit-able for covering weight

groups 0 and 1 with a rear connec-tion to the car belts and its ownbelts to restrain the child. Becauseof their mass, they can be danger-ous if installed incorrectly fastenedto the car belts with a cushion.Strictly adhere to the assembly in-structions provided.

WARNING

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

36

Group 0,0+

Group 1

Group 2

Group 3

PASSENGER SEAT COMPLIANCE WITH REGULATIONS ON CHILD’S SEAT USE

Alfa 156 GTA complies with the new EC Directive 2000/3 regulating child’s seat assembling on the different car seats according tothe following table:

Rear seat for saloon and Sportwagon versions

(*)

(*)

(*)

(*)

Key:

U = suitable for child restraint systems of the “Universal“ category, according to European Standard ECE-R44 for the specified “Groups“

L = suitable for certain child’s restraint systems available at Lineaccessori Alfa Romeo for the specified group

(*) = child’s seats cannot be installed on the rear centre seat with lap belt with two anchor points

Group Range of weight SEAT

Front passenger Rear side Rear centre Rear centrepassenger seat passenger seat passenger seat

(inertial seat belt with (centre lap belt with three anchor points) two anchor points)

0 - 13 kg

9 -18 kg

15 - 25 kg

22 - 36 kg

L

L

L

L

U

U

U

U

U

U

U

U

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

37

4) Always pull the tape to check that thebelts are buckled.

5) All restraint systems are strictly for onechild only: never use for two children at thesame time.

6) Always make sure that the belts do notrest on the child’s neck.

7) During the journey, do not allow thechild to stay in abnormal positions or releasethe belts.

8) Do not carry children in your arms, noteven small babies. No-one, however strong,can keep hold of them in a crash.

9) In the case of accidents, replace thechild’s seat with a new one.

PRESETTING FOR INSTALLINGTHE “ISOFIX TYPE“CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM

The car is created preset for mounting theIsofix type child restraint system. Isofix is anew European standardised system for carry-ing children. Isofix type child restraint systemis an additional option that does not preventfrom using traditional child restraint systems.type Isofix type child restraint system coversthree weight groups: 0, 0+ and 1.

Due to its different anchoring system, theIsofix type child’s seat should be anchoredusing only the proper brackets provided forthe purpose in the car.

It is possible to mount both the tradition-al restraint system and the Isofix type one,one on the left and the other on the right,for example.

Since sizes are different, it is possible toinstall max two Isofix type child's seats us-ing the proper couplings on the rear seator three traditional child's seats using theseat belts. On the front passenger seat it ispossible to mount only traditional child'sseats.

Below is a summary of the safe-ty rules to be observed when car-rying children:

1) The recommended position for in-stalling a child’s seat is on the rear seat, asit is the most protected in the event of acrash.

2) If the passenger’s air bag is deactivat-ed always check that deactivation has tak-en place through the special warning lightF.

3) Carefully follow the instructions pro-vided with the child’s seat, which the sup-plier is obliged to attach. Keep them in thecar together with the documents and thisbooklet. Do not use used seats without theinstructions for use.

If a passenger’s air bag isinstalled, children should

never travel on the front seat.

WARNING

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

38 fig. 56

We recommend to adopt these child’sseats since they have been designed and ex-perimented expressly for Alfa 156 GTA.

If using Isofix type child's seats, remem-ber that just those specifically designed, ex-perimented and certifed for the car can beused.

The car is fitted (optional for versions/mar-kets where applicable) with the Kiddy Isofixseat, certified according to European Stan-dard ECE-R44/03 for babies up to 18 kgweight to be positioned facing the runningdirection and the seat for babies up to 13kg weight to be positioned facing backwards(groups 0,0+ and 1).

A0B0298m

Isofix type child’s seats are to be anchoredto two metal brackets, set between the rearseat back and the cushion and that can beidentified through the slots in the seat cov-er (A-fig. 56).

Install the child restraintsystem only with the car

stationary. The Isofix type child re-straint system is properly anchoredto the preset brackets when clicksare heard. In any case, keep to theinstallation instructions that mustbe provided by the child restraintsystem’s Manufacturer.

WARNING

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

39

For proper installation proceed as follows:

– check whether the release lever (B-fig. 57) is at rest position (inward)

– find the presetting brackets (A), thenposition the child’s seat with the fasteningdevices (C) aligned with the brackets

– push the child restraint system until hear-ing the locking clicks.

As the child grows up, passing to weightgroup 1 the child’s seat should be mountedfacing forwards (running direction).

Installation of the seat for weight group 1

For proper installation proceed as follows:

– check whether the release lever (B-fig. 58) is at rest position (inward)

– find the presetting brackets (A), thenposition the child’s seat with the fasteningdevices (C) aligned with the brackets

– push the child restraint system until hear-ing the locking clicks.

If the Isofix type seat is positioned facingbackwards, the passenger’s seat must bepositioned completely back until touchingthe child’s seat back.

Installation of the seat for the 0 and 0+ groups

For children of the 0, 0+ weight group, thechild’s seat is facing backwards (babies upto 13 kg) and the child is restrained by thechild’s seat belts (D-fig. 57).

fig. 57

A0B0400m

fig. 58

A0B0401m

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

40

FRONT AND SIDE AIR BAGS

The car is fitted with front Air bags for thedriver (fig. 59), for the passenger (fig.60), side bags (fig. 61) and window bags(fig. 62).

FRONT AIR BAGS

Description and operation

The front air bag (driver’s and passenger’s)is a safety device that comes into action inthe event of a head-on collision.

It is formed of an instantly-inflating cush-ion contained in a special recess:

– in the centre of the steering wheel forthe driver;

– in the dashboard and with a larger-sizedcushion for the passenger.

The front Air bag (driver’s and passenger’s)is a device designed to protect the occupantsin the event of head-on collision of medium-high severity by the interposition of the cush-ion between the occupant and the steeringwheel or dashboard.

In the event of a crash, the electronic con-trol unit processes the signals leading froma deceleration sensor and when necessary,triggers inflation of the cushion.

fig. 59

A0B0396m

fig. 60

A0B0276m

fig. 61

A0B0452m

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

41

The cushion inflates instantly as a protec-tive barrier between the occupants’ bodiesand the structures which could cause injury.The cushion deflates immediately after-wards.

The front air bag (driver’s and passenger’s)does not replace but is complementary tothe use of belts, which should always beworn, as specified by law in Europe andmost non-European countries.

In the event of a crash a person that is notwearing the seat belt moves forwards andmay come into contact with the cushionwhile it is still opening. Under these cir-cumstances the protection offered by thecushion is reduced.

Front air bags are designed to protect car’soccupants in front crashes and therefore non-activation in other types of collisions (sidecollisions, rear-end shunts, roll-overs, etc…)is not a system malfunction.

In collisions against highly deformable ormobile objects (road signposts, heaps of iceor snow, etc.), rear collisions (hit from be-hind by another vehicle), side collisions,wedging under other vehicles or protectivebarriers (for example under a lorry or guardrail) cutting in of the air bag is not activat-ed as it does not offer any more protectionthan the seat belts therefore activationwould be inappropriate.

Therefore the failure to be triggered doesnot mean that the system is not workingproperly.

fig. 62

A0B0277m

Please don’t apply stickersor other objects to the

steering wheel, to the air-bag cov-er on the passenger's side or on theside roof lining to the upholsteryon the roof side. Don’t place ob-jects on the dashboard passenger’sside (such as mobile phones) be-cause they could tamper with thecorrect opening of the passenger’sair-bag and than cause serious in-juries to the vehicle occupants.

WARNING

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

42

PASSENGER’S FRONT AIR BAG

The passenger’s front air bag has been de-signed to improve the protection of a per-son wearing a seat belt.

Its volume at maximum inflation fills mostof the space between the dashboard and thepassenger.

MANUAL DEACTIVATIONOF PASSENGER’S FRONT AIR BAG

Should it be absolutely necessary to car-ry a child on the front seat, the passenger’sfront air bag can be deactivated.

Deactivation/reactivation takes place withignition key at STOP and operating it in thespecial key switch on the right-hand side ofthe dashboard (fig. 63). Access to theswitch is only possible with the door open.

Use the switch only withthe engine off and the ig-

nition key removed.

WARNING

SERIOUS DANGER:The car is fitted with

front passenger’s air bag. Neverplace cradle child’s seats on the frontpassenger seat of cars equippedwith passenger air bag since the airbag activation could cause seriousinjuries, even mortal. In the case ofneed, always deactivate the pas-senger’s air bag when a child’s seatis placed on the front seat. The frontpassenger seat shall be adjusted inthe most backward position to pre-vent any contact between child’sseat and dashboard. Even if notruled by law, for better protectionof adults you are recommended toreactivate the air bag immediatelyas soon as child transport is nolonger necessary.

ATTENTION

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

43

The warning light F on the check pan-el glows steadily until the passenger’s Airbag is reactivated.

Deactivation of the front passenger’s airbag does not prevent operation of the sideAir bag.

With the door open the key can be insertedand removed in both positions.

SIDE AIR BAGS (SIDE BAG - WINDOW BAG)

The side bag and window bag have thetask of increasing protection of the occu-pants in the event of a side crash of medi-um-high severity.

They are formed of an instantaneously-in-flating cushion:

– the side bag is housed in the back restof the front seats; with this solution it is al-ways possible to have the cushion in the op-timum position in relation to the passenger,regardless of the adjustment of the seat;

– the window bags, which are “curtain“cushions, are housed in the side roof liningcovered by a special trim, which makes itpossible to extend the cushion downwards.This solution, designed to protect the head,makes it possible to offer the highest degreeof protection to the front and rear occupantsin the event of side crash, thanks to the widecushion inflation surface.

In the event of a side crash, an electroniccontrol unit processes the signals leadingfrom a deceleration sensor and activates,when necessary, inflation of the bags.

The key switch (fig. 63) has two posi-tions:

1) Passenger’s front Air bag active: (ONposition P) warning light on check paneloff; it is absolutely prohibited to carry chil-dren on the front seat.

2) Passenger’s front Air bag deactivated:(OFF positionF) warning light F oncheck panel on; it is possible to carry chil-dren protected by special restraint systemson the front seat.

fig. 63

A0B0279m

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

44

The bags inflate instantaneously, settingthemselves between the body of the frontpassengers and the car door. The bags de-flate immediately afterwards.

In the event of minor side crashes (forwhich the restraining action of the seat beltsis sufficient), the air bags are not deployed.Also in this case it is of vital importance towear the seat belts since in case of sidecrash they guarantee proper positioning ofthe occupant and prevent the occupant tobe pitched out of the car in case of violentcrashes.

Therefore the side air bags do not replacebut are complementary to the use of belts,which you are recommended to alwayswear, as specified by law in Europe and mostnon-European countries.

Operation of the side air bags and windowbags is not disabled by the front air bag de-activation switch, as described in the previ-ous paragraphs.

IMPORTANT The front and/or side airbags may be activated if the car is subjectedto heavy shocks or accidents that involve theunderbody area, such as for example violentbumps against steps, pavements or fixed ob-stacles on the ground, falling into big holesor bumpy roads.

IMPORTANT The triggering of air bagsreleases a small amount of powder. This pow-der is not harmful and does not indicate astart of fire; also the surfaces of the deployedbag and the car interior may be covered withdusty residue: this may irritate the skin andeyes. In the event of exposure, wash withneutral soap and water.

IMPORTANT In the event of side crash,you can obtain the best protection by thesystem keeping a correct position on theseat, thus allowing correct window bag un-folding.

The airbag system has a validity of 14years for the pyrotechnic charge and 10years for the coil contact (see the plate lo-cated on the front left door near the lock).Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services forreplacement as these dates approach.

Never lean head, armsand elbows out of the win-

dow.

WARNINGNever rest head, arms

and elbows on the door, onthe windows and in the windowbag area to prevent possible in-juries during the inflation phase.

WARNING

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

45

IMPORTANT If an accident has trig-gered the air bag, Alfa Romeo AuthorizedServices must be contacted to have the de-vices activated replaced and to have thewhole system checked.

All operations involving checking, repair-ing and replacing components concerningthe Air bag must be carried out by AlfaRomeo Authorized Services.

If the car is to be demolished, Alfa RomeoAuthorized Services should be contacted be-forehand to have the system deactivated.

If the car changes ownership, the newowner must be informed of the instructionsfor use and of the above warnings and begiven this “Owner’s Manual“.

IMPORTANT The triggering of the pre-tensioners, front air bags and side bags isdecided by the electronic control unit in adifferentiated manner depending on the typeof crash. The failure to trigger one or moreof them does not necessarily indicate a sys-tem malfunction.

GENERAL CAUTIONS

Do not cover the back restof front seats with trims or

covers there are not set for the useof side bags.

WARNING

Never travel with objectson your lap, in front of the

chest or with a pipe, pencil, etc. be-tween your lips. Serious injury mayresult in the case of the air bag be-ing triggered.

WARNING

If the car has been stolenor an attempt to steal it

has been made, if it has been sub-jected to vandals or floods, havethe Air bag system checked by Al-fa Romeo Authorized Services.

WARNING

Always keep your handson the steering wheel rim

when driving, so that if the Air bagis triggered, it can inflate withoutmeeting any obstacles. Do not dri-ve with the body bent forwards,keep the seat back rest in the erectposition and lean your back wellagainst it.

WARNING

If the ¬warning light doesnot turn on when turning

the ignition key to MAR or if itstays on when travelling, this couldindicate a failure in safety retain-ing systems; under this conditionair bags or pretensioners could nottrigger in the event of collision or,in a restricted number of cases,they could trigger accidentally. Stopthe car and contact Alfa Romeo Au-thorized Services to have the sys-tem checked immediately.

WARNING

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

46

You are reminded thatwhen the ignition key is

engaged and in the MAR position,the Air bags can be triggered alsoon a stationary vehicle, if it isbumped by another moving vehi-cle. Therefore, even with the carstationary, never allow children onthe front seat. You are also re-minded that with the car station-ary, without the key engaged andturned, the Air bags are not trig-gered in the event of an impact; inthis case the failure to trigger theair bags should not be considereda system failure.

WARNINGTurning the ignition key to

MAR the Fwarning light(with the passenger’s front Air bagdeactivation switch at ON) turnson for about 4 seconds, and thenflashes for another 4 seconds toremind that the passenger’s Airbag and corresponding side Airbags will be activated in the eventof a crash, then it goes off.

WARNING

Do not wash the seatback with pressurised wa-

ter or steam (by hand or at auto-matic seat washing stations).

WARNING

Do not hook rigid objectsto the coat hooks and to

the support handles.

WARNING

The front Air bags are de-signed to be triggered for

heavier crashes than the preten-sioners. It is therefore normal forthe pretensioners only to be trig-gered for crashes within the twoactivation thresholds.

WARNING

The air bag does not re-place the seat belts, but in-

creases their effectiveness. Addi-tionally, as the front air bags arenot triggered for head-on collisionat low speed, side crashes, crash-es from behind or overturning, inthese cases the occupants are pro-tected only by the seat belts, whichmust, therefore, always be fas-tened.

WARNING

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

47

STEERING WHEELLEVERS

The devices and services controlled by thelevers on the steering wheel can only be ac-tivated when the ignition key is in the MARposition.

LEFT-HAND LEVER

The left-hand lever controls the externallights except the foglamps and the rear fog-light.

When the external lights are switched onthe various controls located on the dash-board are illuminated.

The sidelights will come on if the ignitionkey is in the PARK position, regardless ofthe position of the knurled ring.

Lights switched off (fig. 64)

When the pointer on the knurled ring is op-posite the symbol O, the external lights areswitched off.

Sidelights (fig. 65)

The sidelights are switched on by turningthe knurled ring from O to6.

The3 warning light on the instrumentpanel will come on at the same time.

Dipped-beam headlights (fig. 66)

These are switched on by turning theknurled ring from 6 to2.

fig. 66

A0B0373m

fig. 64

A0B0371m

fig. 65

A0B0372m

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

48

Main-beam headlights (fig. 67)

When the knurled ring is in the 2 posi-tion, the headlights can be changed fromdipped-beam to main-beam by pushing thelever towards the dashboard (stable posi-tion). The 1 warning light will come onon the instrument panel.

To return from main-beam to dipped-beam,once again pull the lever towards the steer-ing wheel and then release.

Flashing (fig. 68)

The headlights are flashed by pulling thelever towards the steering wheel (unstable po-sition) regardless of the position of the knurledring. The 1warning light on the instrumentpanel will come on at the same time.

IMPORTANT Only the main-beam lightsare flashed. To avoid penalties, follow localregulations.

Direction indicators (fig. 69)

Moving the lever to the stable position will:

up - engage the right-hand direction indi-cators.

down - engage the left-hand direction in-dicators.

One of the warning lights (R or E) willcome on on the instrument panel at thesame time.

The lever is returned to its home positionautomatically and the indicators areswitched off when the steering wheel isstraightened.

IMPORTANT If you wish to signal arapid change of direction involving only aminimum movement of the steering wheel,the lever can be moved up or down withoutclicking (unstable position). When releasedthe lever will return to its home position.

fig. 69

A0B0376m

fig. 67

A0B0374m

fig. 68

A0B0375m

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

49

RIGHT-HAND LEVER

The right-hand lever is used to operate thewindscreen wiper and windscreen washer.The control used to activate the windscreenwashers also activates the headlights wash-ers, if fitted.

Windscreen wiper - windscreenwasher (fig. 70-71)

The lever can be moved to five differentpositions corresponding to:

A - Stationary (off).

B - Intermittent.

With the lever in position (B), turning thering (F) four possible intermittent speedsare obtained:■ = intermittent slow.■■ = intermittent medium.■■■ = intermittent medium-fast.■■■■ = intermittent fast.

C - Continuous, slow.

D - Continuous, fast.

E - Fast, temporary (unstable position).

Operation in position (E) is limited to thetime the lever is held in this position. Whenthe lever is released, it returns to position(A) automatically stopping the wiper.

fig. 71

A0B0377m

fig. 70

A0B0250m

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

50

“INTELLIGENT WASHING“ FUNCTION(fig. 72)

Pulling the lever towards the steeringwheel (unstable position) operates the wind-screen washer.

Keeping the lever pulled, with only onemovement it is possible to operate the wash-er jet and the wiper at the same time; indeed,the latter comes into action automatically ifthe lever is pulled for more than half a sec-ond.

The wiper stops working a few strokes af-ter releasing the lever; a further “cleaningstroke“ after a few seconds completes thewiping operation.

Rain sensor (fig. 73)

The rain sensor (A), is an electronic de-vice combined with the windscreen wiperwhich has the purpose of automatically ad-justing the number of wipes during inter-mittent operation, to intensity of the rain.

All the other functions controlled by theright-hand lever remain unchanged.

The rain sensor is activated automaticallymoving the right-hand lever to position (B-fig. 70) and it has a range of adjustmentthat gradually varies between wiper sta-tionary (no wiping) when the windscreen isdry, to wiper at first continuous speed (con-tinuous, slow) with heavy rain.

Turn ring (F-fig. 71) to set the rain sen-sor sensitivity level:

AUTO = automatic sensitivity setting.■■ = low sensitivity■■■ = medium sensitivity■■■■ = high sensitivity.

Operating the windscreen washer with therain sensor activated (lever at position B)the normal washing cycle is performed atthe end of which the rain sensor resumes itsnormal automatic function.

Turning the ignition key to STOP the rainsensor is deactivated and the next time theengine is started (MAR position) it will notbe reactivated even if the lever has remainedin position (B). In this case to activate therain sensor, simply move the lever to (A)or (C) and then back to (B).

fig. 72

A0B0378m

fig. 73

A0B0012m

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

51fig. 74

A0B0379m

When the rain sensor is reactivated, thewiper performs one stroke, even if the wind-screen is dry, to indicate that reactivationhas occurred.

IMPORTANT In case of failure of theright-hand stroke or rain sensor, windscreenwiper operation with the right-hand leverat (B) shall take place in intermittent mode.

The rain sensor is located behind the innerrear-view mirror in contact with the wind-screen and inside the area cleaned by thewiper and it controls an electronic controlunit which in turns controls the wiper motor.

At each start, the rain sensor automaticallystabilises at a temperature of about 40°Cto eliminate any condensation from the con-trol surface and prevent the formation of ice.

The rain sensor is able to detect and au-tomatically adapt to the presence of the fol-lowing particular conditions which requiredifferent sensitivity:

– impurities on the control surface (salt,dirt, etc.);

– streaks of water caused by worn wiperblades;

– difference between day and night (thehuman eye is more disturbed during thenight by the wet glass surface).

Headlight washers (fig. 74)

These are operated when the sidelights areon and the windscreen washer is switchedon.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

52

CRUISE CONTROL(optional for versions/marketswhere applicable)

GENERAL

The speed regulator (CRUISE CON-TROL), with electronic control, makes itpossible to drive the car at the requiredspeed without pressing the accelerator ped-al. This reduces driving fatigue on motor-ways, especially during long journeys be-cause the speed memorised is automaticallymaintained.

IMPORTANT The device can only be en-gaged at speeds above 30 km/h.

The device may only be engaged in the 4th

or 5th gear. Travelling downhill with the de-vice engaged, the car speed may increasemore than the memorised one, due to thechange in the engine load.

The device is disengaged automatically inany one of the following cases:

– pressing the brake pedal;

– pressing the clutch pedal;

– if the ASR system cuts in;

– with Selespeed transmission if a gear ischanged;

– if car speed is below the set limit;

– if operating the gear lever without press-ing the clutch pedal.

CONTROLS (fig. 75)

Cruise Control is controlled by theON/OFF knurled ring (A), by the +/–ring (B) and by the RCL button (C).

Ring (A) has two positions:

– OFF: in this position the device is de-activated;

– ON: is the normal operating position ofthe device: the warning light Üon the checkpanel turns on.

Ring (B) serves for memorising and main-taining the car speed or for increasing or low-ering the speed memorised.

Turn the ring (B) to (+) to memorise thespeed reached or increase the speed mem-orised.

Turn the ring (B) to (–) to lower the speedmemorised.

Each time the ring is actuated (B) the speedincreases or lowers by about 1 km/h.

Keeping the ring turned the speed changescontinuously. The new speed reached willbe maintained automatically.

The RCL button (C) resets the memorisedspeed.

fig. 75

A0B0055m

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

53

IMPORTANT Turning the ignition key toSTOP or the ring (A) to OFF, the speedmemorised is cleared and the system isswitched off.

The ring (A) can be constantly left to ONwithout damaging the device. However, wesuggest to disconnect the device when it isnot used, turning the ring to OFF, to avoidfortuitous speed memorisations.

TO MEMORISE THE SPEED

Move the ring (A) to ON and take the carto the required speed normally. Turn the ring(B) to (+) for at least three seconds, thenrelease it. The car speed is memorised andit is therefore possible to release the accel-erator pedal.

The car will continue to travel at the mem-orised constant speed until one of the fol-lowing condition takes place:

– pressing the brake pedal;

– pressing the clutch pedal;

– if the ASR system cuts in;

– with Selespeed transmission if a gear ischanged.

IMPORTANT In the case of need (whenovertaking for instance) acceleration is pos-sible simply pressing the accelerator pedal;later, releasing the accelerator pedal, the carwill return to the speed memorised previ-ously.

TO RESET THE MEMORISEDSPEED

If the device has been disengaged for ex-ample pressing the brake or clutch pedal,the memorised speed can be reset as fol-lows:

– accelerate gradually until reaching aspeed approaching the one memorised;

– engage the gear selected at the timeof speed memorising (4th or 5th speed);

– press the RCL button (C).

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

54

TO INCREASE THE MEMORISED SPEED

The speed memorised can be increasedin two ways:

1) pressing the accelerator and then mem-orising the new speed reached (turning thering (B) for more than three seconds);

or

2) momentaneously turning the ring (B)to (+): each pulse of the ring will correspondto a slight increase in speed (about 1 km/h)while pressing continuously will correspondto a continuous speed increase. Releasing thering (B) the new speed will be memorisedautomatically.

TO REDUCE THE MEMORISED SPEED

The speed memorised can be reduced intwo ways:

1) disengaging the device (for instancepressing the brake pedal) and then memo-rising the new speed (turning the ring (B)to (+) for at least three seconds);

2) keeping the ring pressed (B) at (–)until reaching the new speed which will bememorised automatically.

RESETTING THE MEMORISED SPEED

The memorised speed is automatically re-set turning off the engine or moving the ring(A) to OFF.

When travelling with thecruise control on, do not

move the gearshift lever to neutral.

WARNING

The cruise control may on-ly be engaged at speeds

above 30 km/h.

WARNINGIf the device is faulty or

not working, turn the ring(A) to OFF and contact Alfa RomeoAuthorized Services after checkingthat the protection fuse is intact.

WARNING

It is advisable to engagethe cruise control only

when the conditions of the trafficor road so permit under complete-ly safe conditions: i.e.: straight anddry roads, dual carriageways ormotorways, flowing traffic andsmooth road surface. Do not en-gage the device in town or inheavy traffic conditions.

WARNING

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

55

DASHBOARD

1. Side air outlets - 2. Defrosting/demisting vents for side windows - 3. Upper side vents - 4. Radio controls on the steering wheel (whereapplicable) - 5. Outside lights control lever - 6. Speedometer (mileage recorder) - 7. Check panel - 8. Rev counter - 9. Windscreen wiper con-trol lever - 10. Fuel level gauge - 11. Centre air vents - 12. Infocenter Display - 13. Clock - 14. Engine coolant temperature gauge - 15. Sound system - 16. Passenger’s Air bag - 17. Glove box - 18. Controls for heating, ventilation and climate control - 19. Ashtray and cig-ar lighter - 20. Hazard warning lights switch - 21. Ignition switch - 22. Steering wheel lock/release lever - 23. Driver’s Air bag and horns -24. Cruise Control control lever (if provided) - 25. Bonnet opening lever - 26. Set of controls: instrument panel lighting adjustment, trip me-ter reset and headlamp aiming device

fig. 76A0B0407m

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

A0B0282m

56

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

fig. 77

A. Speedometer (mileage recorder) - B. Odometer with double counter (total and partial) display - C. Check panel - D. Rev counter - E. Fu-el level gauge with reserve warning light - F. Clock - G. Engine coolant temperature gauge with maximum temperature warning light - H. Warning lights.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

57

REV COUNTER

The danger zone (red) indicates excessivehigh engine revs. Do not drive for long pe-riods with the pointer in this area.

IMPORTANT The electronic injection con-trol system gradually shuts off the flow of fu-el when the engine is “over-revving“ result-ing in a gradual loss of engine power.

The rev counter may, when the engine isidling, indicate gradual or sudden increaseof engine revs as the case may be; such be-haviour is normal and must not be inter-preted as a faulty condition as it occurs dur-ing normal operation, for instance whenclimate control or electric fan are switchedon. In particular, slow revs variation helpskeep the battery charged.

FUEL GAUGE AND RESERVE IMPORTANT LIGHT

This shows the amount of fuel left in thefuel tank.

This warning light ç comes on to indicatethat approximately 7 litres of fuel are left inthe tank.

IMPORTANT Under certain conditions(heavy slopes, for instance), the reading onthe gauge may differ from the actual amountof fuel in the tank and changes in level maybe indicated late.

This condition falls within the operation log-ics of the electronic control circuit to avoidhighly unstable readings due to swaying ofthe fuel when travelling.

IMPORTANT Refuelling shall always beperformed with engine off and ignition keyto STOP. If the engine is off but the keyis to MAR, a wrong fuel level could tem-porarily be indicated. This is due to the in-ternal system control logic and cannot beconsidered as a system malfunctioning.

ENGINE COOLANTTEMPERATURE GAUGE AND MAXIMUM TEMPERATUREIMPORTANT LIGHT

This shows the temperature of the enginecoolant fluid and begins when the fluid tem-perature exceeds approx. 50°C.

The pointer should normally be towardsthe middle of the scale. If the pointer reach-es the higher temperature values of the scale(red area), the request for vehicle perfor-mance should be decreased.

The illumination of the çwarning light (to-gether with the message shown by the Info-center display) indicates an excessive tem-perature of the engine cooling fluid. In thiscase, stop the car and contact Alfa Romeo Au-thorized Services.

IMPORTANT The temperature of the en-gine coolant may rise towards the maximumvalues (red) when the vehicle is driven at lowspeeds, especially when the ambient air tem-perature is high. In this case, the vehicle shouldbe stopped and the engine switched off for afew minutes after which the journey can beresumed, preferably at a higher speed.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

58 fig. 78

A0B0489m

ODOMETER(with double counter display)

The display shows:– the mileage on the first line (6 figures)– the trip meter (4 figures) and the

outside temperature (where applicable)on the second line.

To reset the trip meter, keep the button(A-fig. 78) pressed for a few seconds.

INFOCENTER DISPLAYRHEOSTAT LIGHTS ADJUSTMENT

This function makes it possible to adjustthe brightness (dimming/brightening) ofthe Infocenter display during night and day.

To perform the desired brightness adjust-ment (night or day), use buttons âorã,bearing in mind that:

– if the outside lights are on, the mes-sage BRIGHTN. ADJUST. NIGHT will appearon the display (fig. 79)

– if the outside lights are off, the messageBRIGHTN. ADJUST. DAY will appear on thedisplay (fig. 80).

Pressing button â, or after about 5 sec-onds from last operation performed, returnsto previous screen.

IMPORTANT During failure indicationdisplaying, brightness cannot be adjustedsince under these conditions the display getsautomatically to max. brightness.

fig. 79

A0B2008g

fig. 80

A0B2007g

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

59

INFORMATION AVAILABLEON STANDARD SCREEN

– Date (A-fig. 81)

– Outside temperature (B-fig. 81)

– Last item recalled from the Trip computer(e.g. Average velocity C-fig. 81) orengine oil temperature

– Warning message display with respectivesymbols (e.g. icy roads D- fig. 81).

The standard screen will remain on untila function is activated which requires be-ing shown on the display (e.g. “Infocenterdisplay rheostat lights adjustment“).

INFORMATION ABOUTVEHICLE CONDITION (for each event)

– Scheduled maintenance programme ex-piry

– Trip computer information

– Rheostat brightness adjustment.

Moreover, a menu is available which al-lows the driver to perform, by operating thecontrol buttons (see “Control buttons“ in thenext pages) the following controls and set-tings:

INFOCENTER DISPLAY

The Infocenter display is able to display allthe useful and necessary information duringdriving, in particular:

fig. 81

A0B2107g

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

60

Set-up menu

SPEED LIMIT

– Switching on/off the relevant signal(ON/OFF)

– Speed limit setting

TRIP B ON/OFF

– Switching on/off the relevant function(ON/OFF)

DATE SETTING/TIME SETTING

– Day setting– Month setting– Year setting– Hour setting– Minute setting

LANGUAGE SELECTION

– Setting the language for the messagesshown on the display

UNITS SELECTION

– Selection of the following units: km ormi (miles), °C or °F, l/100 km orkm/l

IMPORTANT/FAILURE BUZZERVOLUME SETTING

– Volume setting of warning/failurebuzzer

“WINTER“ TYRES SPEED LIMIT

– Switching on/off the relevant function(ON/OFF)

– Setting the limit speed value among theavailable ones (160 km/h, 190 km/hor 210 km/h)

PROGRAMMED MAINTENANCE

– Displaying the expiry date of the nextcar service check (strictly related to theProgrammed Maintenance Schedule)

DISPLAY CONTRAST ADJUSTMENT

– Infocenter display graphics contrast set-ting (dimming/brightening)

“DEFAULT“ VALUES RESET

– Switching on/off the relevant function(ON/OFF)

EXIT MENU– Exiting the menu

IMPORTANT The use of polarized glass-es may reduce Infocenter display readabili-ty.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

61

CONTROL BUTTONS (fig. 82-83)

To make use of the information that the Infocenter display (with the key in the MAR position) is able to provide, you should first get fa-miliar with the relevant control buttons (placed on the central console aside the climate control/ventilation controls and on top of the leftlever for the Trip computer function) and use them in accordance with the descriptions below. It is also recommended that you read over thischapter before performing any operation.

fig. 82

fig. 83

ã

SET button

A single press for less than 2 seconds (pulse), shown by ä in the followingscreens, to scroll the different Trip computer information screens

A single press for more than 2 seconds, shown byå in the following screens,to reset the Trip computer information (reset) and initiate a new mission

INFO,â,ãbuttonsDepending on the cases: to scroll the menu screens and their respective optionsupwards or to increase the displayed value

Depending on the cases: to scroll the menu screens and their respective optionsdownwards or to decrease the displayed value

A single press for less than 2 seconds (pulse), shown by ç in the followingscreens, to confirm the desired option and/or switch to the next screen or ac-cess the menu

A single press for more than 2 seconds, shown by é in the following screens,to confirm the desired option and return to the previous screen

A0A0013m

A0A0014m

+INFO

-

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

62

MENU OFF SPEED

TRIP B

DATEDEFAULT VALUES

INTENSITY

WINTER TYRES

LANGUAGE

UNITS

BUZZER

SERVICE

MENU DESCRIPTION

The menu is made up of a set of functions arranged in a “circular fashion“, which can be selected by means of buttons â andã, for ac-cess to the different select operations and settings (see the examples “LANGUAGE“ and “DATE“ in the table below); for further details, alsorefer to “Access to the menu screen“ in the following pages.

Day

Minutes Month

YearHour

ç

English

Nederlands

Español

Français

Deutsch

Italiano

Portoguese

ç

ç

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

63

If the display shows an anomaly message, see paragraph“Warning lights and indications“ in this chapter.

INITIAL CHECK

By turning the ignition key to the MAR position, the Infocenter display will show the message CHECK ACTIVE: this indicates the start of thediagnosis phase for all the electronic systems available on the vehicle; this phase lasts a few seconds. If, during this phase, no anomaly isfound and after the engine has been started, the display will show the message CHECK OK.

Standard screen display

If nofailuresarepresent

Is theengine

started?YES

NO

or

continues on next page

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

64

The Programmed Maintenance Schedule includes car maintenance every 20,000 km (or12,000 miles) or one year; this is shown automatically, with the ignition key at MAR, startingfrom 2,000 km (or 1,240 miles) or 30 day from this deadline and it is shown again every 200km (or 124 miles) or 3 days. When a programmed maintenance interval (“coupon“) is near tocome, turning the ignition key to MAR, will display the message SCHEDULED SERVICE WITHIN

followed by the number of kilometers, days or miles to go before vehicle maintenance. ThePROGRAMMED MAINTENANCE message is displayed in km, mi or days, according to the

approaching service interval. At the very moment the value of 0 km, 0 miles or 0 days isreached, the display will show, every time the ignition key is turned to MAR, the messageSCHEDULED SERVICE EXPIRED, followed by the number of kilometers, miles or days. In this

case, to reset this visual information contact Authorised Alfa Romeo Services.

continued from previous page

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

65

ACCESS TO THE MENU SCREEN

After the INITIAL CHECK, it is possible to access the menu screen by pressing button ç.

To navigate use the â andã buttons.

IMPORTANT If you access the Menu and no setting/adjustment is made within about 60 seconds, the system automatically leaves theMenu and displays the screen previously set. In this case, the latest setting selected but not confirmed (by means of button ç) is not stored;therefore, the operation must be performed again.

– When the car is running, only the short menu can be accessed (SPEED LIMIT setting).

– When the car is stopped, the extended menu can be accessed.

The following table gives the description of the cases provided.

Example of standardscreen

Is the carmoving?

Short menu screen

SPEEDTRIP BDATELANGUAGEUNITSBUZZERWINTER TYRESSERVICEINTENSITYDEFAULT VALUESMENU OFF

çSee

INITIAL CHECK NO

YES

Extended menu screen

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

66

SPEED LIMIT (SPEED)

With this function it is possible to set the car speed limit which, if exceeded, automatically sounds a buzzer and displays a specific messageto alert the driver. To set the limit speed, proceed as follows:

Use the â and/orã buttons to set the speed required. During the settingoperation, the value flashes on the screen. The possible setting is between 30

and 250 km/h or between 20 and 150 mph, depending on the unit set previously(see paragraph UNITS described later). Every press (pulse) of the button increases

or decreases by one unit. Keeping the button pressed obtains automaticfast increase or decrease. When you are near the required setting,release the button and complete adjustment with single presses.

Menu screen

Return to menu screen

Return to previouslyset screen, e.g.:See INITIAL CHECK and

ACCESS TO THE MENU SCREEN

ç

é

Select, by means of buttons â oã activation or deactivation(ON/OFF). The set option will be highlighted.

ç

ç

é

âã

âã

âã

é

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

67

Speed limit exceeded indication

As soon as the vehicle exceeds the set speed limit, the following display is shown automatically, together with the sounding of a buzzer.

Example of display when the set value is 120 km/h

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

68

TRIP B ON/OFF (TRIP B)

With this option it is possible to turn ON or OFF the TRIP B function (partial trip) which displays the figures relating to: TRAVEL DISTANCE B, AVER-AGE CONSUMPTION B, AVERAGE VELOCITY B, TRAVEL TIME B during a “partial mission“.

For further details, see “General Trip -Trip B“

Menu screen

Return to menu screen

See INITIAL CHECK and ACCESSTO THE MENU SCREEN

Return to previouslyset screen, e.g.

âã

âã

Using the â orã buttons choose activationor deactivation ON/OFF.

The set option will be highlighted.

ç

é

ç

é

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

69

DATE SETTING/TIME SETTING (DATE)

To set the date (day - month - year) and the time (hours-minutes), proceed as follows:

Menu screen

Return to previouslyset screen, e.g.:

âã

âã

âã

âã

Menu screen Each press (pulse)on the â orã buttons

increases or decreases by one unit. Keeping the

corresponding button pressedobtains automatic fast increaseor decrease. When you are near

the required value, releasethe control and complete

adjustment by single presses.

See INITIAL CHECKand ACCESS TO THE MENU

continues on next page

ç

é

ç

é

ç

é

ç

é

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

70

Return to menu screen

âã

âã

Each press (pulse) ontheâ orã buttonsincreases or decreases

by one unit. Keeping thecorresponding button pressed

obtains automatic fast increaseor decrease. When you are near

the required value, releasethe control and complete

adjustment by single presses.

continued from previous page

Return to previouslyset screen, e.g.:ç

é

ç

é

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

71

LANGUAGE SELECTION (LANGUAGE)

The messages shown on the display can be provided in several languages (Italian, German, English, Spanish, French, Dutch, Portuguese).

To select the required language, proceed as follows:

Menu screen

Return to menu screen

Return to previously set screen, e.g.

âã

âã

See INITIAL CHECK and ACCESSTO THE MENU SCREEN

ç

é

ç

é

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

72

UNITS SELECTION (UNITS)

The display provides information in relation to the unit of measure set. To choose the units, proceed as follows:

Menu screen

Return to menu screen

Return to previouslyset screen, e.g.

âã

âã

âã

âã

See INITIAL CHECK and ACCESSTO THE MENU SCREEN

ç

é

é

é

é

ç

ç

ç

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

73

IMPORTANT/FAILURE BUZZER VOLUME SETTING (BUZZER)

The volume of the buzzer that signals any failure or warning to the driver can be adjusted according to a pre-set scale using theâ and/orã buttons. To switch OFF or adjust, proceed as follows:

Menu screen

Return to menu screen

Return to previouslyset screen, e.g.

âã

âã

See INITIAL CHECK and ACCESSTO THE MENU SCREEN

ç

é

ç

é

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

74

“WINTER“ TYRES SPEED LIMIT (WINTER TYRES)

With this function it is possible to set the speed limit when travelling with winter tyres. The speed limit can be chosen between: 160 km/h,190 km/h or 210 km/h (see paragraph “Winter tyres“ in section “Correct use of the car“).

âã

ç

é

See INITIAL CHECK and ACCESSTO THE MENU SCREEN

âã

Select, by means of buttons â orã activation or deactivation(ON/OFF). The set option will be highlighted.

é

ç

éç

Return to previouslyset screen, e.g.

Return to menu screenMenu

screen

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

75

PROGRAMMED MAINTENANCE (SERVICE)

With the SERVICE function it is possible to receive information connected with correct vehi-cle maintenance. To consult this function, proceed as follows:

Menu screen

Return to menu screen Return to previouslyset screen, e.g.

âã

See INITIAL CHECK and ACCESSTO THE MENU SCREEN

ç

ç é

â

ã

â

ã

â ã

ã â

â

ã

â

ã

âã

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

76

The Programmed Maintenance Schedule includes vehiclemaintenance every 20,000 km (or 12,000 miles) or one year; this

is shown automatically, with the ignition key at MAR, startingfrom 2,000 km (or 1,240 miles) or 30 day from this deadline andit is shown again every 200 km (or 124 miles) or 3 days. When a

programmed maintenance interval (“coupon“) is near to come, turning the ignition key toMAR, will display the message SCHEDULED SERVICE WITHIN followed by the number of

kilometers, days or miles to go before vehicle maintenance. The PROGRAMMEDMAINTENANCE message is displayed in km, mi or days, according to the approaching serviceinterval. At the very moment the value of 0 km, 0 miles or 0 days is reached, the display

will show, every time the ignition key is turned to MAR, the message SCHEDULED SERVICEEXPIRED, followed by the number of kilometers, miles or days. In this case, to reset this

visual information contact Authorised Alfa Romeo Services).

IMPORTANT Products shown in the SERVICE screen and to be used for scheduled maintenance could be subject to modifications. Refer toparagraph "Fluids and lubricants" in section "Technical specifications".

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

77

DISPLAY CONTRAST ADJUSTMENT (INTENSITY)

This function allows to adjust the Infocenter display intensity (dimming/brightening).

To perform the adjustment, proceed as follows:

Menu screen

Return to menu screen

Return to previouslyset screen , e.g.

âã

âã

See INITIAL CHECK and ACCESSTO THE MENU SCREEN

ç

é

ç

é

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

78

“DEFAULT“ VALUES RESET (DEFAULT VALUES)

The following function:

– If ON restores: Speed limit, Trip B, Light rheostat, Language, Temperature unit, km/mi unit, Consumption unit, Buzzer, Winter tires, Con-trast, with the following values Speed limit = 120 km/h, Trip B ON, Light rheostat ON = 4, Light rheostat OFF = 1, Language = Italian, Tem-perature unit = °C, Distance unit = km, Consumption unit = l/100 km, Buzzer = 2, Winter tires OFF (value set at 160 km/h), contrast val-ue = 3

– If OFF, the above parameter values can be set manually

Menu screen

Return to menu screen

Return to previously set screen, e.g.

âã

âã

See INITIAL CHECK and ACCESSTO THE MENU SCREEN

ç

é

ç

é

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

79

EXIT MENU (MENU OFF)

With this function it is possible to exit the setup menu and return to the previously set screen.

Menu screen Return to previously set screen, e.g.

âã

See INITIAL CHECK and ACCESSTO THE MENU SCREEN

ç

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

80

GENERAL TRIP - TRIP B

The TRIP COMPUTER function gives information relating to the operating status of the vehicle on the Infocenter display. This function comprisesthe GENERAL TRIP concerning the complete mission of the car and TRIP B concerning the partial car mission. This function (as shown in thegraph below) is contained within the complete mission. Both functions are resettable.

The GENERAL TRIP displays the figures relating to RANGE, TRAVEL DISTANCE, AVERAGE CONSUMPTION, ACTUAL CONSUMPTION, AVERAGE VELOCITY, TRAVELTIME (com-plete mission time), ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE.

The TRIP B (with automatic reset each time at least 2 hours have passed since stopping the engine), displays information concerning TRAVELDISTANCE B, AVERAGE CONSUMPTION B, AVERAGE VELOCITY B, TRAVEL TIME B (partial mission time).

Start of journey procedure (reset)

To start a new journey monitored by the GENERAL TRIP, with the ignition key at MAR, press the button ã withå (see “Control but-tons“).

The reset operation (pressing the å button) in the presence of the screens concerning the GENERAL TRIP also makes it possible to resetTRIP B. The reset operation (pressing the å button) in the presence of only the screens concerning TRIP B makes it possible to reset only theinformation associated with this function.

IMPORTANT The RANGE and ACTUAL CONSUMPTION information cannot be reset.

Reset TRIP BEnd of partial mission

Start of new partial mission

˙Reset TRIP B

End of partial missionStart of new partial mission

˙

˙

Reset TRIP B

˙ ˙

˙

TRIP B

TRIP B

TRIP B

End of partial missionStart of new partial mission Reset TRIP B

End of partial mission Start of new partial mission

GENERAL TRIP

Reset GENERAL TRIPEnd of complete mission

Start of new mission˙

Reset GENERAL TRIPEnd of complete mission

Start of new mission ˙

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

81

IMPORTANT At the beginning of a new mission, due to battery reconnection, the average consumption value is initialised to the “aver-age predefined standard consumption“ equal to 12 l/100 km.

The TRIP COMPUTER information is displayed in sequence according to the table below.

Reset GENERAL TRIP and TRIP B, excluding Range and Actual Consumption

(see next paragraph RESET GENERAL TRIP)

ä ä

ä

ä ä ä

åäå

ä

å

åå

See INITIAL CHECK and ACCESSTO THE MENU SCREEN

Continues onnext page

Previously set screen; e.g.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

82

TRIP B ON?

IMPORTANT Pressing the â button returns automatically to the standard screen

ää

åååå

ä ä

Reset TRIP B (see next paragraphRESET TRIP B)å

Return to previouslyset screen, e.g.:

YES

NOContinued fromprevious page

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

83

After resetting TRIP by pressing the button with å mode, the display will show the following functions:

Reset GENERAL TRIPå = Reset GENERAL TRIP and TRIP B

(excluding Range and Actual Consumption)

å = Reset TRIP BReset TRIP B

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

84

RANGE = This shows the distance (in km or miles) the car can still cover before needing fuel if keeping the same driving conditions. Thedisplay will show “-- - -“ after the following events:

A) range values lower than 50 km (approx. 31 miles) (after the reduced range warning message)

B) Parking with running engine or car speed lower than 4 km/h for over 5 minutes.

TRAVEL DISTANCE = This shows the distance traveled by the car from the start of the new mission (*).

AVERAGE CONSUMPTION = This shows the average actual consumption in l/km or in l/100km depending on the unit selected.

ACTUAL CONSUMPTION = This shows the consumption of the car updated every 5 sec. approx. If parking with running engine or incase of speed values lower than 4 km/h the display will show “-- - -“. Actual consumption calculation algorithm, according to the above pro-cedure, restarts as soon as the car speed will be equal to or higher than 4 km/h.

AVERAGE VELOCITY = This shows the average speed of the car as a function of the overall travel time elapsed from the start of thenew mission (*)

TRAVELTIME = time elapsed from the start of the new mission (*)

(*) NEW MISSION: this takes place when performing the “manual“ reset by pressing the dedicated button.

IMPORTANT GENERAL TRIP is reset automatically when the Distance Traveled is equal to 9999,9 km (or mi), when Travel Time is 99:59(99 hours and 59 minutes) or after reconnecting the battery.

IMPORTANT If no information is available, all the TRIP COMPUTER parameters display the message “****“ instead of a value, togetherwith the typical description of each parameter. When the normal operation condition is resumed, the count of the various parameters startsagain normally, with no reset of the values displayed prior to the failure, nor the start of a new mission.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

85

WARNING LIGHTS AND INDICATIONS

GENERAL WARNING

The failure indications shown on the Infocenter display, together with the buzzer (adjustable) and the turning on of the relevant warn-ing light (if available), are accompanied by specific warning messages (e.g. “Go to dealer“, “Switch off eng., do not proceed“, etc…).These warnings are concise and precautionary and are intended to suggest the prompt action that the driver should take when afailure occurs. However, these warnings are not to be considered exhaustive and/or alternative to the prescriptions of this Owner’s Manual,which must always be read over carefully. When an anomaly occurs always refer to the contents of this chapter.

IMPORTANT When an anomaly occurs, the Infocenter display reaches its maximum brightness. By pressing button â the warning mes-sages disappear and the symbol referring to the failure warning is reduced to an icon in the right bottom area of the display.

IMPORTANT The anomaly warnings that appear on the Infocenter display are divided into two categories: very serious and serious anom-alies. Very serious anomalies are displayed indefinitely, by interrupting any message previously shown on the display, and are proposed againevery time the ignition key is turned to MAR, until the malfunction is eliminated. Moreover, the “cycle“ can be interrupted by pressing but-tonâ: in this case, the symbol referring to the anomaly will be shown in the right bottom area of the display until the malfunction is elimi-nated.

Serious anomalies are displayed for about 20 seconds and then disappear, but they are proposed again every time the ignition key in turnedto MAR. At the end of the display cycle, equal to about 20 seconds, or when button â, is pressed, the symbol referring to the anomaly willbe shown in the right bottom area of the display until the malfunction is eliminated.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

86

Warning light Messageon display

xLOW BRAKE FLUID AND/OR HANDBRAKE ON

When the ignition key is turned to MAR, the warning light on the dial comes on but must go outafter a few seconds.

The warning light comes on (together with the message + symbol shown on the display) whenthe level of the brake fluid inside the tank falls below the minimum, due to a possible leak in thecircuit and with the car moving.

dBRAKE PAD WEAR

The warning light on the dial comes on (together with the message + symbol shown on the dis-play) when the front brake pads are worn; in this case, have them replaced as soon as possible.

IMPORTANT As the car is fitted with wear sensors for the front brake pads, when replacing them,also check the rear brake pads.

If the warning light x comes on when travelling (together with themessage on the display), check that the handbrake is not engaged.

If the warning light stays on with the handbrake off (together with the mes-sage on the display), stop immediately and contact Alfa Romeo AuthorizedServices.

WARNING

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

87

Warning light Messageon display

HIGH ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE

When the ignition key is turned to MAR, the warning light comes on but must go out after afew seconds.

The engine coolant temperature warning light comes on (together with the message + symbolshown on the display) when the engine is overheated.

If the warning light comes on, proceed as follows:

– Normal driving conditions: stop the car, switch the engine off and check if the water lev-el inside the tank is not below the reference mark MIN.

In this case, wait a few minutes to let the engine cool down, then open the cap slowly and care-fully, fill with coolant, making sure its level is between reference marks MIN and MAX on thetank. Moreover, perform a visual check for any fluid leakage. If the warning light comes on againthe next time the engine is started, contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

– Car heavy duty (e.g. towing a trailer uphill or car fully loaded): slow down and, if the warn-ing light stays on, stop the car. Pause for 2 or 3 minutes, keeping the engine on and slightly accel-erated to facilitate better coolant circulation, then switch the engine off.

Check correct fluid level, as described above.

IMPORTANT In case of highly demanding use of the car, you are recommended to keep theengine on and slightly accelerated for a few minutes before switching it off.

WARNING

When the engine is very hot, do not remove the tank cap: dangerof burns.

ç

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

88

Warning light Messageon display

¬AIR BAG FAILURE

When the ignition key is turned to MAR, the warning light on the check panel comes on, but mustgo out after a few seconds. This warning light will come on glowing steadily if there is an operatingfailure in the Air bag system.

FPASSENGER’S FRONT AIR BAG DEACTIVATED

The check panel warning light F turns on when the passenger’s front Air bag is deactivated by meansof the relevant key switch. With the passenger’s front Air bag activated, turning the ignition key to MAR,the warning light on the check panel comes on but must go out after approx. 4 seconds.

If the ¬ warning light does not turn on when turning the ignition key to MARor if it stays on when travelling, this could indicate a failure in safety retaining

systems; under this condition air bags or pretensioners could not trigger in the event ofcollision or, in a restricted number of cases, they could trigger accidentally. Stop the carand contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services to have the system checked immediately.

WARNING

The failure of the warning light ¬ (warning light off) is also indicated bythe flashing of the passenger’s front Air bag deactivated warning light F

for more than the normal seconds.

WARNING

Warning light F indicates also warning light ¬ failure. This is indicated byintermittent flashing, over 4 seconds, of warning light F. In this event, warn-

ing light ¬ could be not up to indicate restraint system failures, if any. Stop the car andcontact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services to have the system checked immediately.

WARNING

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

89

<SEAT BELTS NOT FASTENED

The warning light on the check panel will turn on for some seconds when, with the ignition key atMAR, the driver’s seat belt is not fastened properly.

Warning light Messageon display

vLOW OIL PRESSURE

When the ignition key is turned to MAR, the warning light on the check panel comes on butmust go out as soon as the engine is started.

wLOW BATTERY CHARGE

When the ignition key is turned to MAR, the warning light on the check panel comes on, but mustgo out as soon as the engine is started (a slight delay is permitted when the engine is running atidle). It if stays on, contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services immediately.

If the warning light v comes on when travelling (together withthe message + symbol shown on the display), switch the engine off

immediately and contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

WARNING

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

90

Warning light Messageon display

INCOMPLETE DOOR CLOSING

The message + symbol shown on the display will appear when one or more doors or the tailgateare not properly shut.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

91

Warning light Messageon display

UENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM (EOBD) FAILURE

In normal conditions, turning the ignition key to MAR, the dial warning light turns on but it shouldgo off when the engine has started. The initial turning on indicates that the warning light is work-ing properly.

If the warning light stays on or turns on (together with the message + symbol shown on the dis-play) when travelling:

glowing steadily - indicates a fault in the supply/ignition system which could cause high ex-haust emissions, possible lack of performance, poor handling and high consumption levels.

In these conditions, it is possible to continue driving without however demanding heavy effort orhigh speeds. Prolonged use of the car with the warning light on may cause damage. Contact an Al-fa Romeo Authorized Service as soon as possible.

The warning light turns off if the fault disappears, but it is still stored by the system;

flashing - indicates that the catalyst could be damaged (see paragraph on “EOBD system“ in thischapter).

If the warning light flashes, it is necessary to release the accelerator pedal to lower the speed un-til the warning light stops flashing; continue travelling at moderate speed trying to avoid drivingconditions that could cause the warning light to flash again. Contact an Alfa Romeo Authorized Ser-vice as soon as possible.

If, when turning the ignition key to MAR, the warning light U doesnot switch on or if it turns on glowing steadily or flashing when trav-elling, contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Service as soon as possible. The

operation of the warning light U can be checked by traffic agents by properequipment, therefore comply with the regulations in force in the country whereyou are driving.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

92

Warning light Messageon display

¢ALFA ROMEO CODE SYSTEM

When the ignition key is turned to MAR the warning light on the check panel should flash onlyonce and then go out. If the warning light stays on with the key at MAR, this indicates a possiblefailure: see “Alfa Romeo CODE system“.

IMPORTANT The turning on at the same time of U and¢ warning lights indicates a failureof the Alfa Romeo CODE System.

If with the engine running, the ¢ warning light flashes, this means that the car is not protectedby the engine inhibitor device (see “Alfa Romeo CODE system“ in this chapter). Contact Alfa RomeoAuthorized Services to have all the keys memorised.

INERTIAL FUEL CUT-OFF SWITCH

The message + symbol are shown on the display when the fuel cut-off switch comes into opera-tion.

If, after the message has been displayed, you can smell fuel or no-tice leaks from the supply system, do not re-engage the switch to

avoid the risk of fire.

WARNING

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

93

Warning light Messageon display

Inefficient EBD electronic braking distributor

x

>+

>INEFFICIENT ABS SYSTEM

When the ignition key is turned to MAR, the warning light comes on but must go out after afew seconds.

This warning light comes on (together with the message + symbol on the display) when the sys-tem is inefficient. In this case, normal braking is ensured, though without making use of the ABSsystem. Caution is recommended, especially in cases of less than perfect grip. In any case, contactAlfa Romeo Authorized Services as soon as possible.

The vehicle is equipped with an electronic braking distributor (EBD).Simultaneous lighting of dial warning lights > andx (together with

the message + symbol on the display) with the engine running indicates anEBD system failure; in this case, any sudden braking action can cause earlylocking of rear wheels, with possible sideslip. Drive very carefully and go im-mediately to the nearest Alfa Romeo Authorized Service to have the sys-tem checked.

WARNING

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

94

Warning light Messageon display

VASR – WHEEL ANTISKID SYSTEM

Turning the ignition key to MAR, the warning light on the dial turns on, but should go off after afew seconds. The warning light turns on together with the led on the ASR OFF button when thesystem is switched off by the drivers. The warning light flashes when the system cuts in, to alertthe driver that the system is adapting to the road surface grip conditions.

If the drivers doesn’t switch off the system, the turning on of the warning light, together with themessage (ASR OFF) on the display, indicates a failure of the ASR system. In this case contact AlfaRomeo Authorised Services as soon as possible.

WOUTSIDE LIGHT FAILURE

When the ignition key is turned to MAR, the dial warning light comes on but must go out aftera few seconds.

The warning light comes on when an anomaly is found in one of the following lights:

– sidelights

– braking lights or corresponding fuse

– rear fog guards

– number plate lights.

The warning of a fault may mean one or more blown bulbs, a burnt fuse or cut off connection.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

95

Warning light Messageon display

SPEED LIMIT EXCEEDED

The message + symbol turn on, together with the sound of the buzzer, on the display when thevehicle exceeds the speed limit set previously (see “Speed limit“ in this section).

FUEL RESERVE

The warning light comes on when about 7 litres of fuel are left in the tank, and when the carrange is below 50 km.

REDUCED RANGE

This message is displayed when the car range is below 50 km.

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE

This message appears on the display 2,000 kilometres from the deadline given in the ScheduledMaintenance Programme (every 20,000 km) and it is shown again at timed intervals, turning theignition key to MAR every 200 km.

ç

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

96

Warning light Messageon display

RLEFT-HAND DIRECTION INDICATOR (INTERMITTENT)

This warning light comes on when the control lever is moved downwards or, together with right-hand indicator, when the hazard warning lights are switched on.

4

5

REAR FOG GUARDS

This warning light comes on when the rear fog guards are turned on.

FRONT FOG LIGHTS

This warning light comes on when the front fog lights are turned on.

ERIGHT-HAND DIRECTION INDICATOR (INTERMITTENT)

This warning light comes on when the control lever is moved upwards or, together with the left-handindicator, when the hazard warning lights are switched on.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

97

Warning light Messageon display

1MAIN-BEAM HEADLIGHTS

The warning light comes on when these lights are turned on.

3

Ü

SIDELIGHTS AND DIPPED-BEAM HEADLIGHTS

The warning light on the dial comes on when the sidelights or dipped-beam headlights are switchedon.

CONSTANT SPEED ADJUSTMENT (CRUISE CONTROL) (where applicable)

The warning light on the check panel turns on, with the knurled ring of the cruise control in theON position, when the device starts to intervene on the engine.

lDIRECTION INDICATORS IF A TRAILER IS TOWED

The warning light on the dial comes on when the direction indicator control lever is moved up ordown, or when the hazard warning light button is pressed.

POSSIBLE PRESENCE OF ICE ON THE ROAD

The message + symbol are shown on the display, and the buzzer sounds, when the outside tem-perature reaches or falls below 3°C to warn the driver of possible presence of ice on the road.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

98

Warning light Messageon display

t

t

SELESPEED GEARBOX FAILURE

Turning the ignition key to MAR, the warning light on the cluster shall come on and then go offafter about 4 seconds.

If the warning light stays on, it indicates that a fault has been detected in the Selespeed gearbox;at the same time, the buzzer beeps intermittently for 4 seconds to draw the attention of the driver.

Contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services as soon as possible to remove the fault.

Q-SYSTEM AUTOMATIC GEARBOX FAILURE

Turning the ignition key to MAR, the warning light on the cluster shall come on and then go offafter about 4 seconds.

If the warning light stays on or turns on when travelling, it indicates overheated gearbox oil (glow-ing steadily) or a gearbox fault (flashing).

Warning light glowing steadily: it indicates that the gearbox oil has reached the maximumestablished temperature. To make oil cooling down, stop the car, move the lever to P or N and letthe engine idle until the warning light goes out. Resume driving without demanding high performancefrom the engine. If the warning light comes on again, it is necessary to stop again with the engineidling until it goes out again. If the interval between one lighting up of the warning light and next isbelow 15 minutes, you are advised to stop the car, turn the engine off and wait for the engine-gear-box unit to cool down completely. Contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services as soon as possible.

Warning light flashing: it indicates a fault in the automatic gearbox. The automatic controlsystem provides an emergency programme. Under these circumstances, you are advised to stopthe car and turn the engine off; in fact, the next time the engine is started, the self-diagnostic sys-tem could cut off the fault which will however be memorised. Conversely, if the fault remains(warning light flashing), it is necessary to select the gears manually as if driving a car with mechanicalgearbox, bearing in mind that the only two speeds available are the 2nd and 4th gear. Contact AlfaRomeo Authorised Services as soon as possible.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

99

CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM

1 Central defrosting/demisting vents for windscreen - 2 Adjustable upper side vents - 3 Defrosting/demisting vents for side windows - 4 Adjustable side air outlets - 5 Adjustable upper vent - 6 Adjustable centre, swivel vents - 7 Front feet area fixed vents - 8 Rear feet areafixed vents - 9 Rear adjustable swivel outlets.

fig. 84A0A0359m

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

100

UPPER VENT ADJUSTMENT(fig. 85)

The vent has an opening/closing control.

• = Completely closed.

) = Completely open.

CENTRE VENT ADJUSTMENT(fig. 86)

Each vent has a lever which makes it pos-sible to direct the flow of air towards thepassengers in an horizontal direction. To ad-just the air flow, use the opening/closingcontrol.

• = Completely closed.

( = Completely open.

UPPER SIDE VENTADJUSTMENT (fig. 87)

On the dashboard ends are adjustablevents (A) for car interior, and fixed de-frosting/demisting vents (B) for side win-dows.

Air flow can be adjusted by means of theknob (C).

• = Completely closed.

) = Completely open.

fig. 85

A0B0015m

fig. 86

A0B0037m

fig. 87

A0B0039m

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

101

REAR SWIVEL OUTLET ADJUSTMENT

Fig. 88: front seats (on dashboard ends)

Fig. 89: rear seat (on the console be-tween seats)

AUTOMATIC TWO-ZONE CLIMATECONTROL SYSTEM

To start the system:

– turn the knob rings to set the requiredtemperatures (driver’s side – passenger’sside).

– press the AUTO (fig. 90) button.

IMPORTANT The climate control sys-tem makes it possible to adjust the tem-peratures required for the two sides with amaximum difference of 7°C between thedriver’s and the passenger’s sides.

IMPORTANT The climate control com-pressor works only when the engine is run-ning and the outside temperature is morethan 2°C.

fig. 88

A0B0038m

fig. 89

A0B0289m

Air flow can be adjusted by means of vanes(A) with press-on opening and closing.

Air flow can be directed by rotating the out-let by means of the vanes.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

102

For more detailed information on the sys-tem and how to make the best use of it,read the instructions given in the followingpages.

The coolant used for theclimate control system isR134a which meets cur-

rent regulations and does not harmthe environment in the event of ac-cidental spillage.Absolutely avoid the use of oth-

er fluids which are incompatiblewith the system components.

fig. 90

A0B0382m

GENERAL

The car is equipped with a two-zone cli-mate control system, controlled by an elec-tronic control unit which makes it possibleto separately adjust the air temperature onthe driver’s side and on the passenger’s side.To obtain optimum temperature control inthe two areas of the passenger compart-ment, the system has an outside sensor, apassenger compartment sensor and a two-zone sun ray sensor.

The system is integrated with an incipientmisting sensor installed behind the internalrearview mirror, which is able to “monitor“a predefined area of the windscreen innersurface which can automatically act on thesystem to prevent or reduce misting, througha series of operations such as: opening airrecirculation, enabling compressor, air flowto the windscreen, fan speed sufficient fordemisting; and, in case of heavy misting,enabling the MAX-DEF function.

The climate control com-pressor cannot work when

the outside temperature is lessthan 2°C. Therefore, it is recom-mended that the internal air recir-culation function v is not usedwhen the outside temperature islow, as the windows could mist

WARNING

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

103

The anti-pollution sensoris placed in the air flow infront of the combined par-

ticle activated carbon filter and,therefore, must be protectedagainst possible compressed airjets produced by cleaning equip-ment. Moreover, the water col-lected from the windscreen wipersshould not come into contact withthe sensor: otherwise, the internalair recirculation function could bedisabled for long periods.

IMPORTANT The demisting procedureis enabled every time the ignition key isturned to MAR, or pressing the AUTO but-ton. When this procedure is working it canbe turned off pressing one of the followingbuttons: compressor, air recirculation, air dis-tribution, air flow. This operation inhibits theincipient misting sensor signal until theAUTO button is pressed again or the nexttime the ignition key is turned to MAR.

The system is integrated by an anti-pollu-tion sensor that is able to switch on the in-side air recirculation function automatical-ly, to reduce the unpleasant smell of pollutedair when driving in urban areas, queues, tun-nels, and when the windscreen wash/wiperis operated (with the typical smell of spir-its).

IMPORTANT The function of the anti-pollution sensor is subordinate to safety con-ditions; therefore disabling the climate con-trol compressor or at an outside temperaturebelow 4°C, the sensor is disabled. In anycase, the sensor can be re-enabled press-ing the recirculation button vuntil takingit to the automatic mode.

To ensure correct opera-tion of the incipient mistingsensor, stickers (e.g. road

licence holder) must not be appliedin the “control“ area between thesensor and the windscreen. For thisvery reason, both the sensor andthe windscreen must always bekept clean, to avoid accumulationof dirt or other substances.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

104

The air quality control is also entrusted toa combined particle and activated carbon fil-ter.

The climate control system automaticallycontrols and adjusts the following parame-ters and functions:

– temperature of the air admitted to thepassenger compartment (for the driver’s andpassenger’s side separately)

– fan speed

– air distribution

– inside air recirculation on/off

– climate control compressor on/off en-able.

The settings of the following functions canbe modified manually:

– fan speed

– air distribution

– inside air recirculation on/off

– climate control compressor on/off en-able.

– window defrosting/demisting

The control of the functions that have notbeen modified manually will always be au-tomatic and, in any case, the temperatureof the air flowing into the passenger com-partment is controlled automatically de-pending on the temperatures set on the dri-ver’s and passenger’s displays.

IMPORTANT Manual selections prevailover automatic ones and remain in storageuntil the user decides to resume automaticcontrol. The settings selected manually arestored when the engine is switched off andresumed the next time the engine is start-ed.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

105

CONTROLS (fig. 91)

1 - Inside temperature adjustment knob(driver’s side)

2 - Inside temperature set display (driver’sside)

3 - Knob for adjusting the fan speed andswitching the system off

4 - Fan speed set, air distribution and sys-tem off display (OFF)

5 - Inside temperature set display (pas-senger’s side)

6 - Inside temperature adjustment knob(passenger’s side)

7 - Inside air recirculation on/off buttonv (manual/automatic)

8 - Air distribution selection button

9 - Rearscreen heating and wing mirror de-frosting on/off button (

10 - Maximum defrosting/demistingon/off button for windscreen and front sidewindows, rearscreen heating and wing mir-ror coils (function MAX-DEF --)

11 - Button for aligning the temperatureset on the passenger’s side with that on thedriver’s side MONO

12 - Climate control compressor on/offenable button √

13 - Inside air temperature sensor

14 - Button for selecting the system au-tomatic mode AUTO

fig. 91

A0B0056m

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

106

HOW TO USE THE AUTOMATIC TWO-ZONE CLIMATE CONTROL(fig. 91)

IMPORTANT The knob rings are not pro-vided with automatic stopper; therefore,they are free to rotate in both directions oncethey have reached the maximum or mini-mum values.

The system can be started in differentways, but it is recommended that the re-quired temperatures are set on the displays;then, press (14) AUTO button.

Thus, the system will start operating fullyautomatic, to reach the set temperaturesin the shortest possible time and keep them.

During the fully automatic operation of thesystem, the set temperatures can howeverbe modified at any time: the system will au-tomatically modify its own settings to adaptitself to the new requirements.

IMPORTANT The temperature differ-ence between the driver’s and the passen-ger’s sides must not be greater than 7°Cin order to be accepted by the system.

The selections made by the system in au-tomatic mode can be customized by manu-ally acting on the following controls:

– fan speed adjustment knob (3)

– air distribution selection button (8)

– inside air recirculation on/off button (7)v

– climate control compressor on enablebutton (12)√.

Manually selecting one or more of thesefunctions turns off the right led on the but-ton (14) AUTO.

With one or more functions switched onmanually, the temperature control for the airadmitted to the passenger compartment willin any case continue to be monitored auto-matically by the system (left led on button14 AUTO on), except with the climate con-trol compressor off.

In fact, in this condition, the temperatureof the air admitted into the passenger com-partment cannot be lower than the outsideair temperature; this condition is indicatedby the turning off of the two leds on but-ton (14) AUTO and flashing on the display(2) and/or (5) related with the tempera-ture rate that cannot be obtained.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

107

AIR TEMPERATUREADJUSTMENT KNOBS (fig. 92)

Turning the rings of knobs (1 or 6) clock-wise or counterclockwise, respectively high-ers or lowers the temperature of the air re-quired in the left zone (knob 1) or rightzone (knob 6) of the passenger compart-ment. The temperatures set are shown onthe displays (2) and (5) placed below therespective knobs.

Separate operation of the temperatures setis restored automatically using knob (6) isactuated.

Turning the knob rings clockwise or coun-terclockwise, until they reach the extremeselection positions HI or LO, will cause themaximum heating or cooling functions, re-spectively, to be switched on:

fig. 92

A0B0063m

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

108

fig. 93

A0B0064mHI function(highest heating power - fig. 93)

It is switched on by setting a temperatureof more than 32.5°C on the display, andcan be switched on independently from thedriver’s or passenger’s side, or both of them;this setting brings the system to the “one-zone” mode and is shown by both displays.

This functions can be switched on whenyou wish to heat the passenger compart-ment as quickly as possible, by taking thegreatest advantage from the system po-tential.

The function uses the maximum temper-ature of the heating fluid, whereas air dis-tribution to feet and 5th fan speed.

With the function switched on, however,all the manual settings can be made.

To switch the function off, you only needto turn the ring of a knob (1) or (6) of thetemperature set to a value lower than32.5°C; the opposite display will show32.5°C.

By pressing button (14) AUTO, the displayindicates a temperature of 32.5°C and fallswithin an operating condition with automat-ic temperature control.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

109

LO function(highest cooling power - fig. 94)

It is switched on by setting a temperaturelower than 16.5°C on the display; this set-ting is shown by both displays.

This function can be switched on when youwish to cool the passenger compartment asquickly as possible, by taking the greatestadvantage from the system potential.

The function cuts off air heating, switch-es on both internal air recirculation (to pre-vent hot air from entering the compartment)and the climate control compressor, bringsair distribution to E and 5th fan speed.

With the function switched on, however,all the manual settings can be made.

To switch the function off, you only needto turn the ring of a knob (1) or (6) of thetemperature set to a value greater than16.5°C; the opposite display will show16.5°C. fig. 94

A0B0065m

By pressing button (14) AUTO the displayindicates a temperature of 16.5°C and fallswithin an operating condition with automatictemperature control.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

110

fig. 95

A0B0066mMONO BUTTON FORALIGNMENT OF THETEMPERATURES SET (fig. 95)

By pressing button (11) MONO the pas-senger’s side temperature automaticallyaligns with that on the driver’s side and,therefore, the same temperature can be setfor both areas by simply turning the ring ofknob (1), on driver’s side.

This function is provided to facilitate tem-perature adjustment inside the entire pas-senger compartment when only the driveris on board.

Separate operation of set temperatures isautomatically restored when the passengeroperates the ring of knob (6) or by press-ing button (11) MONO.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

111

FAN SPEED ADJUSTMENTKNOB (fig. 96-97)

Turning the ring of knob (3), clockwiseor counterclockwise will cause the fan speed- and, therefore, the amount of air flowinginto the passenger compartment - to in-crease or decrease, respectively; the 16speeds that can be selected are displayedby a bar (every 3 clicks), up to a maximumof 6 illuminated bars:

– max. fan speed = all bars lit;– min. fan speed = one bar lit.

The fan can be cut off (all bars off) onlyif the climate control compressor has beenswitched off by pressing button (12)√.To resume automatic fan speed control af-ter a manual setting has been made, pressbutton (14) AUTO. By fully turning the ringof knob (3) counterclockwise, the systemwill be turned off, with the following situa-tion: display (2) OFF; display (5) OFF; cen-tral display (4) OFF and left-hand led avail-able on internal air recirculation button (7)v ON and both led on AUTO button OFF.

IMPORTANT By pressing the internalair recirculation button (7)v, it is pos-sible to let external fresh air into the pas-senger compartment.

fig. 96

A0B0067m

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

112

fig. 97

A0B0068mTo turn the system on again, you only needto turn the ring of knob (3) clockwise, orpress any button, except the internal air re-circulation button (7) and rear windowheater button (9); this operation resumesall the operating conditions previously storedin the memory.

IMPORTANT After exiting the conditionOFF, the internal air recirculation v is re-sumed to the condition preceding the switch-ing off.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

113

AIR DISTRIBUTION SELECTION BUTTON (fig. 98)

By pressing button MODE (8) repeatedly,you can manually choose one of the five pos-sible modes:

E Flow of air to the dashboard centreand side outlets and rear outlet.

ZE Splitting of the air flow between the

vents to the lower part of the pas-senger compartment (warmest air)and the dashboard centre and side out-lets and the rear outlet (coolest air).This air flow distribution is particular-ly useful in spring and autumn, whenthe sun is shining.

Z Air flow towards the front and rearlower part of the passenger compart-ment. Due to the natural tendency ofheat to spread upwards, this type ofdistribution allows heating of the pas-senger compartment in the shortesttime, also giving a prompt feeling ofwarmth to the coldest parts of thebody.

Q Splitting of the air flow between thewindscreen and side window defrost-ing/demisting vents and the lowerpart of the passenger compartment.This type of air distribution allows sat-isfactory heating of the passengercompartment while preventing pos-sible misting of the windows.

Q Air flow to the windscreen and frontside window vents to demist or de-frost them.

To resume automatic air distribution controlafter a manual selection, press button (14)AUTO.

fig. 98

A0B0069m

Z

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

114

CLIMATE CONTROL COMPRESSOR ON/OFF ENABLE BUTTON √ (fig. 99)

Pressing button (12)√ enables the turn-ing on of the climate control compressor.This condition is shown by the lighting up ofthe led placed on the button itself.

When the climate control compressor isturned off, the leds on buttons (14) AUTOand (12)√ go off; automatic inside air re-circulation control is also excluded (both ledsoff on button 7v) which always staysoff to prevent window misting; in any case,the automatic operation of inside air recir-culation can be resumed (though it is notrecommended) by pressing button 7v.

fig. 99

A0B0070m

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

115

When the climate control compressor is off,it is not possible to admit air to the pas-senger compartment with a temperature be-low the outside temperature; in this case,the value flashes on the display concerningthe temperature that cannot be reached andthe left led on button (14 AUTO - fig.100) goes off.

The switching off of the climate controlcompressor remains in storage even whenthe engine has been stopped. To resume au-tomatic control for switching on the climatecontrol compressor, press button (12)√again, the button led will turn on, or pressbutton (14) AUTO; in which case, the oth-er manual settings set will be cancelled.

fig. 100

A0B0071m

Operation of the climatecontrol compressor is nec-

essary for cooling and dehumidify-ing the air; it is advisable to keepthis function always on, to preventwindow misting problems.

WARNING

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

116

fig. 101

A0B0072mINSIDE AIR RECIRCULATIONON/OFF BUTTON v(fig. 101)

Inside air recirculation is controlled ac-cording to three operating logics:

– automatic control, indicated by the turn-ing on of the right led on the button;

– forced switching on (inside air recircu-lation always on), indicated by the turningon of the left led on the button (and by theright led going off at the same time);

– forced switching off (inside air recircu-lation always off, with air inlet from the out-side), indicated by the turning off of bothleds.

These operating conditions are obtainedby pressing in sequence the inside air recir-culation button (7)v.

When inside air recirculation is controlledautomatically by the system, the right ledon the air recirculation button (7) vstays on all the time and the left led showsthe air recirculation condition:

ON = air recirculation operating;

OFF = air recirculation off.

If inside air recirculation has been switchedon or off manually, the led on button (14)AUTO turns off.

In automatic operation, inside air recircu-lation is switched on automatically when theanti-pollution sensor detects the presence of

polluted air, for instance in cities, queues,tunnels, and when the windscreenwash/wiper is operated (with the charac-teristic smell of spirit).

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

117

With the outside temper-ature below 2°C the cli-

mate control compressor is unableto work. It is therefore inadvisableto use the inside air recirculationfunctionvwith low outside tem-perature as windows may mistover quickly.

WARNING

It is advisable to turn onthe inside air recirculation

system in queues or tunnels toavoid admitting polluted air fromoutside. The prolonged use of thisfunction should however be avoid-ed, especially with several personson board, to avoid the possibilityof the windows misting inside.

WARNING

The inside air recirculationfunction makes it possible

to reach the required “heating“ or“cooling“, conditions faster. It ishowever inadvisable to use it onrainy/cold days as it would con-siderably increase the possibility ofthe windows misting inside, espe-cially if the climate control systemis off.

WARNINGIn certain weather condi-

tions (e.g. outside temper-ature around 0°C) and with auto-matic air recirculation control on,mist may form on the windows. Inthis case press the inside air recir-culation button (7) v, to switchoff recirculation (leds on button off)and if necessary increase the flowof air to the windscreen.

WARNING

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

118

BUTTON AUTO AUTOMATICOPERATION (fig. 102)

When button (14) AUTO is pressed, thesystem automatically regulates the amountand distribution of the air admitted into thepassenger compartment, clearing all the pre-vious manual settings.

This condition is indicated by the lighting ofboth button leds.

When the right led, on button (14) AU-TO, is OFF, it indicates that one or severalmanual operations have been carried outand, therefore, that automatic control is notcomplete (except for temperature control,which is always automatic) indicated by theleft led on.

fig. 102

A0B0073m

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

119

fig. 103

A0B0074mQUICK FRONT WINDOW DEMISTING/DEFROSTINGBUTTON(- MAX-DEF function) (fig. 103)

Pressing button (10)- the climatecontrol automatically activates timed op-eration of all the functions needed toquicken demisting/defrosting of the wind-screen and front side windows, i.e.:

– it turns on the climate control compres-sor;

– switches off inside air recirculation, if on(both leds off);

– sets the maximum air temperature (HI)on both displays (2) and (5);

– operates the fan at a predefined speed;

– directs the flow of air towards the wind-screen and front side window vents;

– turns on rearscreen heating and, if pre-sent, the wing mirror coils.

When the maximum demisting/defrostingfunction is on, the led on button (10)-,the led on the rearscreen heating button (9)( and the led on button (12)√ comeon; at the same time the leds on button (7)v go out.

IMPORTANT If the engine is not warmenough, the function will not engage the pre-defined fan speed immediately, to limit theflow to the passenger compartment of air thatis not warm enough to demist the windows.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

120

When the maximum demisting/defrostingfunction is on, the only manual operationspossible are manual adjustment of the fanand switching rearscreen heating off.

Pressing one of the following buttons:(10)-, (7)v, (11) MONO, (14)AUTO or (12)√ the system switches offthe maximum demisting/defrosting func-tion, resuming the system operating condi-tions prior to turning it on, in addition toactivating the last function required, if any.

WING MIRROR ANDREARSCREEN DEFROSTING/DEMISTING BUTTON ((fig. 104)

Pressing button (9)( , turns on demist-ing/defrosting of the rearscreen and, if pre-sent, the wing mirror coils.

The activation of this function is shownby the turning on of the led on the button.

IMPORTANT Rear heated window man-ual on/off control prevails over automaticactivation decided by the climate control sys-tem control unit.

This function is timed and switches off au-tomatically after 20 minutes, or pressing thebutton again; the function is also switchedoff when the engine is stopped and will notbe switched on again the next time the en-gine is started.

fig. 104

A0B0075m

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

121

IMPORTANT The system turns onrearscreen heating automatically if the tem-perature is below 3°C.

IMPORTANT Do not apply stickers onthe inside of the rearscreen over the heat-ing filaments to avoid damage that mightcause it to stop working properly.

IMPORTANT When reconnecting thenegative battery cable after having discon-nected it, wait for 2 minutes before turn-ing the key to enable the climate control sys-tem to reset actuator strokes properly.

POLLEN FILTER

This filter has the specific capability of com-bining the mechanical filtering of the air withan electrostatic effect so that the outside airadmitted to the passenger compartment ispurified and free from particles such as dust,pollen, etc.

In addition to the above, it also effective-ly reduces the concentration of pollutants.

The filtering action takes place under allair inlet conditions and it is clearly most ef-fective with the windows shut.

Have the conditions of the filter checkedby Alfa Romeo Authorized Services at leastonce a year, preferably t the onset of sum-mer.

If the vehicle is used mainly in pollutedor dusty areas it should be checked and ifnecessary replaced, at shorter intervals.

Failure to replace the fil-ter may considerably re-duce the effectiveness of

the climate control system up toblocking the air flow from the out-lets and vents.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

122

HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS(fig. 106)

They are switched on by pressing button(A), regardless of the position of the igni-tion key.

When the hazard warning lights areswitched on, the switch itself begins to flashtogether with the direction indicator warn-ing lights and the emergency indicator onthe instrument panel. This functions isswitched off by pressing the button again.

CONTROLS

TAILGATE OPENING (fig. 105)

To open the boot pull the lever (A) at theside of the driver’s seat.

fig. 105

A0B0042m

fig. 106

A0B0036m

FRONT FOGLIGHTS (fig. 107)

These come on when button (A) ispressed and when the external lights are al-ready on.

The warning light 5 will light up on theinstrument panel.

By turning the ignition key to STOP, thefog lights are turned off automatically anddo not come on the next time the engineis started without pressing button (A).

Press the button (A) again to switch thefront foglights off.

IMPORTANT The front foglights shouldbe used in compliance with the local trafficlaws.

fig. 107

A0B0285m

Do not operate the bootrelease lever with the car

on the move.

WARNINGUse of the hazard warn-

ing lights is ruled by theHighway Code of the country inwhich the car is used. Observe reg-ulations.

WARNING

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

123

INERTIAL FUEL CUT-OFFSWITCH (fig. 109)

This is an automatic safety switch which istriggered in the event of crash to interruptthe flow of fuel.

The message + symbol are shown on theInfocenter display when the fuel cut-offswitch comes into operation (see “Infocen-ter Display“ in this section) and by the doorunlocking.

fig. 109

A0B0327m

DASHBOARD LIGHTINGADJUSTMENT (fig. 108)

When the outside lights are on, the dash-board lighting is adjusted by pressing button(A).

Each press of the button (A) cyclically se-lects one of the three lighting levels provid-ed: low-medium-high.

REAR FOG GUARDS (fig. 107)

These are turned on, with the dipped beamheadlamps or fog lights on, by pressing but-ton (B).

At the same time, warning light 4 on theinstrument cluster lights up.

By turning the ignition key to STOP, thefog guards are automatically turned off andthey do not come on the next time the en-gine is started unless button (B) is pressed.

Press button (B) to turn them off.

IMPORTANT Always use the rear fogguards in accordance with local regulationsin force.

fig. 108

A0B0326m

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

124

Inspect the care carefully to make sure thatthere are no fuel leaks, for instance in the en-gine compartment, under the vehicle or nearthe tank area.

If no leaks are found and the vehicle canbe restarted again, press button (A) to ac-tivate the fuel supply system.

After an impact, turn the ignition key toSTOP to prevent battery running down.

fig. 110

A0B0044m

OPENING THE FUEL FLAP (fig. 110)

The fuel tank flap is released from insidethe car raising the front part of the lever (A).

HEADLIGHT CORRECTOR (fig. 111)

If the car is fitted with xenon headlights,beam aiming is electric and therefore con-trol (A) on plate at the side of the steer-ing column is not present.

The headlights should be aimed correctlydepending on the vehicle load.

The control (A) on the plate at the side ofthe steering column can be moved to fourpositions corresponding to the vehicle loadsgiven below:

Position 0 : 1 or 2 people occupying frontseats, full fuel tank, on-board equipment pre-sent;

Position 1: 5 people on-board;

Position 2 : 5 people on-board, luggagecompartment full (50 kg approximately);

Position 3 : Driver and 300 kg in luggagecompartment.

fig. 111

A0B0240m

Check the positioning ofthe headlight beams every

time you change the load to be car-ried.

WARNING

If a smell of fuel is notedfollowing an accident, or

the fuel system is leaking, to avoidthe risk of fire do not reset theswitch.

WARNING

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

125

HAND BRAKE (fig. 112)

The hand brake lever is located betweenthe two front seats.

To operate the brake when the vehicle is“stationary“, pull the lever (A) upwards un-til the required braking action is obtained.

When the ignition key is in the MAR po-sition, the x warning light will come on onthe instrument panel.

To release the hand brake:

– slightly lift the lever (A) and press therelease button (B);

– holding the button down lower the lever.Thexwarning light on the instrument pan-el will go out.

To prevent the car from moving acciden-tally, keep the brake pedal pressed whenengaging the handbrake.

fig. 112

A0B0288m

IMPORTANT The handbrake lever (A)is fitted with a safety device which preventsthe brake from being released when, if thelever is pulled, button (B) is pressed. There-fore, to release the brake, in addition topressing button (B), it is also necessary topull lever (A) further upwards to release thesafety device, then lower the lever com-pletely.

The wheels should belocked after a few clicks of

the hand brake lever. If this doesnot occur, contact Alfa Romeo Au-thorized Services to have the handbrake adjusted.

WARNING

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

126

GEARSHIFT LEVER (fig. 113)

The car is fitted with a six speed mechan-ical gearbox.

The position of the individual gears isshown by the pictogram on the gearshiftlever knob.

When changing gear, always fully depressthe clutch pedal. Before engaging reversegear (R) wait for the car to be stationary.

For versions fitted with six speed gearbox,to engage reverse gear (R), raise the ringunder the grip (with the fingers of the samehand holding the lever).

After engaging reverse gear, release thering. It is not necessary to raise the ring onthe lever when shifting from reverse to an-other gear.

fig. 113

A0B0408m

IMPORTANT Reverse gear can only beengaged with the vehicle completelystopped. With the engine running, beforeengaging reverse gear it is necessary to waitfor at least 3 seconds with the clutch pedalfully pressed, to avoid grating and the pos-sibility of damaging the gears.

Do not drive with yourhand resting on thegearshift lever, since the

applied pressure, though slight,may, with the passing of time,damage parts inside the gear.

To change gear smoothly,the clutch pedal must be

fully depressed. Therefore, thereshould be no hindrances under thepedal unit. Make sure that anymats are well laid and do not in-terfere with the pedals.

WARNING

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

127

Gearshifting takes place through a floatingcontrol lever (A-fig. 114) with only onestable central position. Using this lever it ispossible to request increase/decrease of theratio of the gear engaged and/or engage-ment of reverse gear (R) or neutral (N).

There are also two levers on the steeringwheel spokes (fig. 115) through which,only with the car on the move (with speedabove 0.5 km/h), it is possible to shift gearup or down.

SELESPEED GEARBOX (optional for versions/marketswhere applicable)

Car can be supplied with a mechanicalgearbox with electronic control, called “Se-lespeed”.

The Selespeed considerably simplifies theuse of the car, it reduces driving fatigue intown or when frequent gearshifting is nec-essary, but at the same time it assures bril-liant performance.

IMPORTANT To be able to use the Se-lespeed correctly, this chapter should be readin full to understand the correct, permissibleoperations to be carried out right from thestart.

This device comprises a conventional me-chanical gearbox to which an electronical-ly-operated electro-hydraulic device has beenadded which automatically controls theclutch and gear engagement.

The clutch pedal has been eliminated andthe vehicle moves off using only the accel-erator pedal.

fig. 114

A0B0448m

fig. 115

A0B0455m

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

128

Failures of Selespeed gearbox are signalledto the driver through a warning light (A-fig. 116) accompanied by an acoustic sig-nal.

The gearbox can work in two operatingmodes:

– the first is semiautomatic(then calledMANUAL), in which the driver directly re-quests gearshifting through the lever on thecentre console or pressing the buttons at thesteering wheel;

– the second is automatic, called CITY(mode selectable with the specific buttonB-fig. 114, the CITY sign appears on thedisplay fig. 116 fitted on rev-counter), inwhich the system decides directly when toshift gear.

With the gearbox in the CITY mode it isstill possible to carry out manual gearshift-ing, both using the gear lever and the steer-ing wheel controls. The gearbox remains inthe CITY mode.

The gear engaged (fig. 116) is alwayssignalled on the display regardless of the se-lected mode.

N = neutral;

1 = first gear;

2 = second gear;

3 = third gear;

4 = fourth gear;

5 = fifth gear;

6 = sixth gear;

R = reverse.

fig. 116

A0B0402m

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

129

To request gearshifting, in addition to keep-ing the brake pedal pressed it is necessary to:

– to increase gear (+) (fig. 117) pushthe lever “forwards” (if the car is in first gearthis shifts to second, if it is in second gearit goes to third and so on up to fifth). If thesystem is in neutral (N) or reverse (R) theforward movement on the lever causes en-gagement of first gear (1).

– to shift down (–) (fig. 117) push thelever backwards (if the car is in fifth gearit moves to fourth, if fourth gear is engagedit shifts to third and so on down to first).

fig. 118

A0B0450m

SYSTEM ACTIVATION

IMPORTANT Opening the driver’s door,the Selespeed starts the hydraulic part ofthe system to prepare it for the engine to bestarted. This function (noted by the turningof the electric pump) is deactivated after 10openings/closings of the door that are notfollowed by actual system activation usingthe ignition key.

Turning the ignition key to MAR, all thesegments of the display (B-fig. 116), thegearbox failure warning light (A-fig. 116)and the word CITYlight up. After about onesecond, the display indicates the gear en-gaged (N, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, R); from thismoment, the Selespeed system acceptsgearshift commands.

IMPORTANT If after 10 seconds the dis-play segment do not display the gear en-gaged or the failure warning light stays on,turn the ignition key to STOP and wait forthe display to go off, then repeat the sys-tem activation procedure. If the fault per-sists, contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Ser-vices

OPERATION WITH THE ENGINE OFF

IMPORTANT Before operating the gear-shift control lever, always check the gear en-gaged on the display (N, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5,6, R).

When the engine is off and the vehicle isstationary, it is possible to engage all thegears.

With the vehicle stationary and with thebrake pedal pressed, requests to shift gearare accepted only if they are carried outthrough the control lever on the central con-sole.

fig. 117

A0B0449m

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

130

From any gear (N, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) andwith the vehicle practically at a standstill,it is possible to request engagement of re-verse gear, pushing the lever to the right andthen backwards (fig. 119). If the vehi-cle is on the move, the request is not ac-cepted; wait for the car to stop and thenrequest reverse gear engagement again

fig. 119

A0B0451m

To put the gearbox in neutral (N), start-ing from the condition with the vehicle sta-tionary and the brake pedal pressed, it isnecessary to move the gearshift control leverto the right (fig. 118).

IMPORTANT Once a gear has beenshifted it is necessary to release the gearshiftcontrol lever immediately after making therequest. A prolonged action (over 10 sec-onds) causes automatic shifting to CITY;previous conditions are restored when re-leasing the lever.

IMPORTANT If wanting to leave the carparked on a sloping road with a gear en-gaged to keep it braked, it is necessary tocheck that the Infocenter display shows thenew gear engaged and then wait for 1 to2 seconds before releasing the brake ped-al to allow complete clutch engagement.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

131

TURNING THE ENGINE OFFAND SYSTEM DEACTIVATION

Turning the ignition key to STOP the en-gine switches off but the Selespeed systemstill remains active, waiting for the vehicleto stop completely. After about 2 - 4 secondsfrom when the key has been turned to theSTOP position, the hydraulic part is deac-tivated; the Selespeed system is only de-activated at this point.

The gear selected before turning the en-gine off remains engaged.

If the engine stops with the gearbox inneutral (N), the buzzer draws the attentionof the driver so that the vehicle can be putin safety conditions engaging the first gear(1) or reverse (R). In this case, it is nec-essary to turn the ignition key to MAR andwith the brake pedal pressed, engage firstgear (1) or reverse (R).

STARTING THE ENGINE

The engine can be started with the gearengaged or in neutral (N), provided that thebrake pedal is pressed down.

IMPORTANT Keep the brake pedalpressed during the starting operation. As thebrake pedal stiffens if it is pressed repeat-edly with the engine off, in this situation, toallow the engine to be started, it is neces-sary to increase the pressure exerted on thepedal itself.

After starting, the gearbox automaticallysets to neutral, the display shows the let-ter (N) and the system selects the operat-ing mode stored before switching off.

If the engine fails to startwith the gear engaged, the

driver is alerted of the potentiallydangerous situation due to the factthat the gearbox has automatical-ly set to neutral by the buzzer andthe display on the rev counter.

WARNING

NEVER leave the car withthe gearbox in neutral (N).

WARNING

Never remove the keywhen the car is on the

move, because in addition to thefact that the Selespeed systemwould not work properly untilstopping the car, the steeringwheel would automatically lock atthe first turn.

WARNING

It is absolutely necessaryto turn off the engine con-

sequently deactivating the Sele-speed system keeping the brakepedal pressed: release the pedalONLY when the display on the revcounter goes off.

WARNING

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

132

IMPORTANTS

– With the vehicle stationary and a gearengaged, always keep the brake pedalpressed until you decide to move off;

– in prolonged stops with the engine run-ning it is advisable to keep the gearbox isneutral;

– when the car is parked on a slope, donot use the pick-up manoeuvre to keep thevehicle stopped; use the brake pedal andwork on the accelerator pedal only whenyou decide to move off;

– use second gear only when necessaryto obtain better control of pick-up in lowspeed manoeuvres;

– if, with reverse gear engaged, you needto engage first gear or vice versa, shift gearonly when the car is completely stationaryand with the brake pedal pressed.

This should not be considered as a fault asit is part of the operating logic. For the samereason, in the event of sticking on reverse,the system commands partial clutch closingto allow engagement of the gear; in thiscase engagement of reverse gear (R) willbe less comfortable.

Moving off of the vehicle is obtained:

1) releasing the brake pedal;

2) gradually operating the accelerator ped-al.

The vehicle pick-up torque is higher themore the accelerator pedal is pressed.

With ASR off (through the relevant ASROFF button), starting will be more “bril-liant”.

MOVING OFF

With the engine running and the vehiclestationary, the gears that can be engagedfor moving off are only first (1), second (2)or reverse (R).

To engage them it is possible to use thecontrol lever on the centre console, with thebrake pedal pressed, as the levers on thesteering wheel allow gear engagement on-ly over 10 km/h.

IMPORTANT Reverse gear (R) can beengaged from each of the following otherratios: neutral (N), first gear (1) or secondgear (2). If the car is on the move, the re-quest is not accepted; it is necessary to waitfor the car to be completely stopped andthen request reverse (R) again.

The driver is informed of the reverse gearengaged condition by the intermittent soundof the buzzer as well as by the display onthe rev counter.

IMPORTANT If while shifting from re-verse (R)/first gear (1) to neutral(N)/first gear (1) sticking occurs on thefirst gear, the system automatically engagessecond gear (2).

After a request to shiftgear with the vehicle sta-

tionary, before pressing the accel-erator pedal to make the car start,the driver must always check thatthe gear engaged shown on thedisplay is the one required.

WARNING

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

133

STOPPING THE CAR

To stop the vehicle, simply release the ac-celerator pedal and, if necessary, operatethe brake pedal.

Regardless of the gear engaged and of theoperating mode activated (MANUAL orCITY), the system automatically disen-gages the clutch and downshifts gear.

If you intend to move off again withouthaving completely stopped the car, this waythe most suitable gear ratio for re-acceler-ating will be available.

Stopping the vehicle, the system auto-matically engages first gear (1).

Though strongly inadvisable, if due to un-foreseen circumstances when driving down-hill the car is allowed to travel with the gear-box in neutral (N), when the engagementof a gear is requested, the system auto-matically engages the best gear to allowtransmission of the torque to the wheels inrelation to the speed of the car.

Downhill with the gear engaged and theaccelerator released (if the vehicle is trav-elling), if a certain pre-established speed isexceeded, the system automatically en-gages the clutch to provide adequate enginebraking.

Due to safety reasons, the Selespeed sys-tem activates the buzzer when:

– clutch overheating occurs during vehiclestarting; in this case, it is necessary to“force” moving off avoiding hesitations orto release the accelerator and use the brakepedal to park the vehicle if the car is on aslope;

– the car moves in the opposite directionto the gear engaged, (e.g.: vehicle movingforward with reverse engaged); in this sit-uation it is necessary to stop the vehicle andkeeping the brake pedal pressed, engagethe gear correctly.

Still for safety reasons, when the vehicleis stationary, with the engine started andgear (1), (2) or (R) engaged, the systemactivates the buzzer and shifts to neutral(N) automatically when:

– there is no action on the acceleratorand/or brake pedal for at least 3 minutes;

– the brake pedal is pressed for over 10minutes;

– the driver’s door is opened and the ac-celerator and brake pedal are not pressedfor at least 1 second.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

134 fig. 121

A0B0455m

OPERATION

The gearbox can work in two operatingmodes:

– the first is semiautomatic (MANUAL),in which the driver directly decides when toshift gear;

– the second is completely automatic(CITY), in which the system decides di-rectly when to shift gear according to thetype of driving.

The CITY mode can be selected by press-ing the specific button CITY on the gearboxlever knob; when this mode is selected, theCITY sign appears on the display fitted onrev counter.

SEMIAUTOMATIC OPERATION(MANUAL)

In the MANUAL operating mode the dis-play on the rev counter shows the gear en-gaged.

In this operating mode, the decision tochange gear is left to the driver who decidesthe most appropriate moment.

The requests to change gear can take placethrough:

– the control lever on the centre console(A-fig. 120);

– the levers on the steering wheel(fig. 121), which can be used only whenthe vehicle speed exceeds 10 km/h.

fig. 120

A0B0448m

The MANUAL operating mode is setwhen, with the CITY mode selected, theCITY button (B-fig. 120) is pressedagain, excluding the previously selectedmode.

When shifting gear, releasing the acceler-ator pedal is not necessary because the Se-lespeed system directly controls the engineso as to:

– reduce and then increase the enginetorque;

– adapt the engine speed to the new gearratio engaged.

When downshifting, double de-clutching(acceleration of the engine to bring it to thespeed necessary with the new gear ratio) iscarried out automatically.

The move to neutral (N) command is ac-cepted when the car speed exceeds0.5 km/h.

The command to engage reverse gear (R)is accepted only if the car is stationary.

With the accelerator pedal pressed by over60% of its stroke and with an engine speedof over 5,000 rpm, gearshifting becomesquicker.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

135

FAILURE SIGNALLING

Failures to the Selespeed gearbox are in-dicated by the t (A-fig. 123) warn-ing light on the instrument cluster.

When the system is turned on (turning theignition key to MAR), the warning lightshould turn on glowing steadily for about4 seconds and then turn off.

If the warning light stays on it means thata fault to the gearbox has been detected; atthe same time a buzzer sounds intermit-tently for 4 seconds to attract the driver'sattention.

In the MANUAL mode there are someautomatic/safety devices which make dri-ving easier:

– when slowing down, the clutch isopened and the gear ratio is reduced auto-matically to be ready for possibly picking upspeed again; if not, stopping the vehicle,first gear (1) will be engaged automatical-ly;

– request to change gear that could takethe engine above the maximum rpm or be-low the minimum permissible rpm are notaccepted;

– if sticking occurs during the engagementof a gear, the system firstly tries to engagethe required gear again and, if it is still notpossible, it automatically engages the im-mediately higher one to avoid leaving thevehicle in neutral speed.

IMPORTANT It is advisable to wait fora gearshift to end before requesting anoth-er one, this will avoid multiple requests inquick succession.

AUTOMATIC OPERATION (CITY)

The CITY automatic operating mode is se-lected pressing the button (A-fig. 122),at the base of the gearshift lever.

In addition to the gear, the display on therev counter will show the word CITY.

The system decides directly when gearshift-ing according to the engine running speedand the driving style.

Quickly releasing the accelerator pedal, thesystem does not engage a higher gear in or-der to maintain an adequate level of enginebrake.

fig. 122

A0B0447m

fig. 123

A0B0404m

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

136

In the case of a fault to the gearshift lever,the system automatically activates the au-tomatic CITY mode to allow the car toreach the nearest Authorized Alfa RomeoServices to have the fault detected elimi-nated.

In the event of faults to other componentsof the gearbox, the system only allows theengagement of certain ratios: first gear (1),second (2) and reverse (R).

If the warning light tcomes on, contact the AlfaRomeo Authorized Services

as soon as possible to remove thefault.

SIGNALLING WITH THE BUZZER

The buzzer is activated when:

– reverse gear (R) is engaged;

– the vehicle is parked with the gearboxat neutral (N); this can be seen turning theignition key to STOP;

– clutch overheating takes place duringpick-up;

– the car moves in the opposite directionto the gear engaged (e.g.: the car tends todo downhill with reverse gear engaged);

– in the event of gearbox failure;

– the system has automatically engagedneutral (N) after:

• there is no action on the acceleratorand/or brake pedal for at least 3 min-utes;

• the brake pedal is pressed for over 10minutes;

• the driver’s door is opened and the ac-celerator and brake pedal are notpressed for at least 1 second;

• detection of a gearbox fault.

PARKING THE VEHICLE

To park the car safely it is absolutelynecessary to engage first gear (1) or re-verse (R) and, when on a sloping road, al-so engage the hand-brake.

Turning the engine off with the car facinguphill and a gear engaged, it is absolute-ly necessary to wait for the display onthe rev counter to go off before releasingthe brake pedal, so that the clutch hasinnested completely.

If the gearbox is in neutral (N) and youwant to engage a parking gear, it is neces-sary to activate the system and engage thegear (1) or reverse (R) with your foot onthe brake pedal.

In case of transmissionfault, contact the Alfa

Romeo Authorized Services assoon as possible to check the sys-tem.

WARNING

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

137

INTERNAL FITTINGS

GLOVEBOX

On the dashboard there is a key-lockableglovebox with light. The lock can beopened/closed using the ignition key.

To open the glovebox use lever (A-fig. 124).

The compartment is lit by a courtesy lightwhen it is open (when the ignition key isat MAR (B-fig. 125).

There is a recess on the lid (C-fig. 125)for inserting a pen or pencil.

fig. 124

A0B0262m

fig. 125

A0B0261m

TOWING THE VEHICLE

WARNING For towing the vehicle, ad-here to local regulations. Make sure that thegearbox is in neutral (N) (checking that thecar moves when pushed) and proceed as fortowing a normal car with mechanical gear-box following the instructions given in thechapter “In an emergency”.

Should it be impossible to set to neutral,do not tow the vehicle; contact Alfa RomeoAuthorised Services.

Do not travel with theglovebox open; it could

harm the passenger in the event ofan accident.

WARNING

Do not start the enginewhen towing the vehicle.

WARNING

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

138

GRAB HANDLES (fig. 126)

Grab handles are set above the front doors.

Two grab handles (A) fitted with a coathook (B) are located above the rear doors.

fig. 126

A0B0124m

CEILING LIGHTS

The car is fitted with passenger’s com-partment ceiling lights (front/rear) withgradual switching on/off. Timings, definedas max. switching on time elapsing betweenthe end of gradual switching on and the startof gradual switching off are as follows:

1) approx. 6 seconds when:

– unlocking the doors manually or by theremote control

– closing the driver’s door to get into thecar and fit the key into the ignition switch

– removing the key from the ignitionswitch

2) approx. 3 minutes from the door open-ing

IMPORTANT With ignition key atSTOP or when opening a door or the tail-gate 15 minutes timing is activated, thenceiling lights go off. Timing restarts eachtime a door/tailgate is opened.

Front ceiling light (fig. 127)

The roof light comprises two lights with thecontrol switch.

With switch (A) in the central position(1), both lights turn on when a door isopened.

When the doors are closed, a timer is ac-tivated for about 7 seconds, to allow the carto be started. The lights go out when the ig-nition key is turned to MAR (with the doorsclosed).

Moving switch (A) to the left (position 0),the lights stay off (position OFF).

Moving switch (A) to the right (position2) both lights stay on.

The spot function is operated by switch(B).

fig. 127

A0B0260m

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

139fig. 128

A0B0259m

Moving switch (B) to the left (position 1)the left spot light turns on. Moving switchto the right (position 2) the right spot lightturns on.

With switch (B) in the central position (po-sition 0) the spotlights stay off.

IMPORTANT Before leaving the car,make sure that both switches are in the cen-tral position. This way, the roof lights will goout when the doors are closed. If a door isleft open, the lights will go out automaticallyafter a few seconds.

To turn them on again, simply open an-other door or close the same one and openit again.

Courtesy light (fig. 128)

Lowering the passenger’s sun visor, thecourtesy light on the roof lining can be seen.

This light makes it possible to use the cour-tesy mirror under conditions with dim light.

On Sportwagon versions there is also acourtesy light under the driver’s sun visor.

Use switch (A) to turn it on and off, withthe ignition key at MAR.

Rear roof light (fig. 129) (except versions with sunroof)

In correspondence with each rear door thereis a light which turns on automatically whena door is opened.

They are timed and work in the same wayas described for the front roof light.

They can be turned on and off by handpressing the transparent cover (A) on thecircular impression.

fig. 129

A0B0258m

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

140

Centre rear roof lamp (fig. 130) (only versions with sunroof)

On the roof lamp there is a switch withthree positions. When the switch (A) is inthe central position (0) the roof lamp turnson automatically when a door is opened.

Lighting up is timed and it works as de-scribed for the front roof lamp.

Moving the switch to the right (position 1)the roof lamp stays off all the time.

Moving the switch to the left (position 2)the roof lamp stays on all the time.

IMPORTANT Before leaving the carmake sure that the switch (A) is in the cen-tral position (0), so that the lamp goes outwhen the doors are closed.

FRONT ASHTRAYAND CIGAR LIGHTER (fig. 131)

To open the ashtray push and release thefront of the ashtray.

To use the cigar lighter press, with the ig-nition key at MAR, button (B); after someseconds the knob will return automaticallyto its initial position and the cigar lighter isready for use.

Remove the tray (A) to empty and cleanthe ashtray. Always ensure that the

cigar lighter has turned off.

fig. 131

A0B0256m

fig. 130

A0B0257m

The cigar lighter gets ex-tremely hot. Handle with

care and prevent its use by children:danger of fire and/or burning.

WARNING

Do not use the ashtray aspaper bin: it could set on

fire on contact with cigarette stubs.

WARNING

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

141

REAR ASHTRAYS (fig. 132)

An ashtray (A) is fitted to each rear door.

To open, pull downwards as shown below.

fig. 132

A0B0255m

fig. 133

A0B0283m

ODDMENTS RECESSES ON CENTRE CONSOLE (fig. 133)

Centre recess

On the centre console near the handbrakelever, there are the following oddments re-cesses:

– oddments recesses (A) and (B);

– coin recess (C).

ODDMENTS RECESSES ON DASHBOARD

Left side recess (fig. 134)

An oddments recess (A) is provided on thelower side of the dashboard, on the left ofthe steering column.

fig. 134

A0B0254m

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

142

TELEPHONEPROVISION(on request for versions/markets where applicable)

On request for versions/markets whereapplicable, the car may be fitted with a pro-vision for the installation of a cellular tele-phone.

This provision comprises:

– sound system two-function aerial + cel-lular phone;

– supply and connection cables with spe-cific connector for voice kit connection.

The voice kit must be pur-chased separately by thecustomer, since it has to be

compatible with the customer’sown cellular phone.

For the installation of thecellular phone and connec-tion to the provision in the

car, contact only Alfa Romeo Au-thorized Services; this will guaran-tee first-rate results with no pos-sibility of any inconvenience thatmay compromise the safety of thevehicle.

FRONT DOORSCOMPARTMENTS ANDPOCKETS (fig. 135)

Each front door has an oddments pocket(A).

fig. 136

A0B0252m

fig. 135

A0B0253m

SUN VISORS

They can be adjusted frontally and later-ally.

On the back of the visors there is a cour-tesy mirror with sliding cover (A-fig. 136),lit by the lamp (B).

The passenger’s sun visor bears also thesymbol for correct use of children’s seats incars equipped with passenger’s airbag. Forfurther information, see the descriptions giv-en in paragraph “Passenger’s front airbag“in this chapter.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

143

ACCESSORIESPURCHASEDBY THE OWNER

If, after purchasing your car, you want toinstall electric accessories that require per-manent power supply (burglar alarm, voicefunction, radionavigator with satellite bur-glar alarm, etc.) or other accessories that af-fect the vehicle’s electric load, contact AlfaRomeo Authorized Services, whose qualifiedstaff is able to recommend the most suitableequipment of the Lineaccessori Alfa Romeo,and also assess the electric absorption of thesame, checking if the vehicle can withstandthe required load or if a battery of greaterpower must be used.

The transmission and reception efficiencyof this equipment may also be affected bythe shielding effect of the vehicle’s body.

RADIOTRANSMITTERSAND CELLPHONES

Cellphones and other radio transmitters(e.g. CB radios) cannot be used inside thevehicle, unless you use a separate aerialmounted outside the vehicle.

SUNROOF(optional for versions/marketswhere applicable)

The sunroof can only be operated whenthe ignition key is in the MAR position.

Do not open the sunroofwhen snow or ice are onthe roof as this may dam-

age it.

The use of cellphones, CBradios or similar inside the

passenger compartment (withoutan outside aerial) produces elec-tromagnetic RF fields; if these areamplified by the resonance insidethe passenger compartment, theymay not only result in a potentialhealth hazard, or poor functioningof the electronic systems such asengine control units, ABS/EBD con-trol units, etc., fitted to the vehi-cle, but also put the safety of yourvehicle in jeopardy.

WARNING

Improper use of the sun-roof can be dangerous. Be-

fore and while operating it, alwaysmake sure that the passengers arenot exposed to the risk of harmcaused either directly by the sun-roof in motion or by personal itemsdrawn or knocked by it.

WARNING

When leaving the vehicle,the ignition key should al-

ways be removed to avoid acci-dents involving the sunroof whichcould be inadvertently operated byany passenger remaining in the ve-hicle.

WARNING

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

144

RAISING TO THEQUARTERLIGHT POSITION

This can only be achieved (fig. 140)when the sunroof is completely closed,pressing front end (2) of the control button(A-fig. 141).

Press the rear end (1) of the button (A-fig. 141) to return the sunroof to the hor-izontal position (roof closed).

fig. 139

A0B0248m

The sunroof is fitted with a curtain below,which prevents sun radiation and is drawnby hand using a catch.

The curtain is drawn by the roof when theroof opens and is pushed completely insidethe roof panel when the roof is opened com-pletely. With the closing movement the cur-tain will come out partially so that the handcatch is accessible (A-fig. 139).

fig. 138

A0B0249m

SLIDING FORWARDS/BACKWARDS (fig. 137-138)

Press control button (A) on rear end (1)to open the roof; press on front end (2) toclose it.

When the button is released, the sunroofwill stop in that position.

For versions/markets where applicable,during opening the roof stops automatical-ly in an intermediate position called “Com-fort“, which is advised for average speeds.In this case, complete opening is obtainedpressing the rear end (1) of button (A)again. When closing, the roof does not stopin the “Comfort“.

fig. 137

A0B0041m

Open and close the roofonly when the vehicle is

stationary.

WARNING

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

145fig. 140

A0B0247m

EMERGENCY OPERATION

If the electrical control device does notwork, the sunroof can be opened manuallyas follows:

– apply leverage to the points indicatedby the arrows and remove the plate withswitch (D-fig. 141);

– using the special key (B-fig. 142)provided in the glovebox, press androtate the sunroof control bushing(C-fig. 142) clockwise to open and coun-terclockwise to close.

fig. 142

A0B0245m

fig. 141

A0B0246m

IMPORTANT When the operation hasbeen ended, the key should be turned halfa turn in the opposite direction, until aclick is heard, before it is removed.

LUGGAGECOMPARTMENT

The tailgate can be opened from outsidethe vehicle (pressing the button on the ig-nition key) and from inside the vehicle.

IMPORTANT If the boot is not proper-ly shut, the symbol ́ on the Infocenter dis-play will come on (together with the indi-cation of the relevant message).

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

146

Lifting the boot lid is made easier by theaction of gas springs.

OPENING WITH REMOTE CONTROL (fig. 144)

The luggage compartment can be openedby remote control from outside pressing thebutton (C-fig. 144), also when the elec-tronic alarm is on.

In this case, the alarm system switches offvolumetric protection and the boot lid con-trol sensor. The system also sounds twobeeps and the direction indicators light upfor about three seconds (with the exceptionof versions for certain markets).

Closing the boot again the control functionsare restored, the system sounds two beepsand the direction indicators light up for aboutthree seconds (with the exception of versionsfor certain markets).

The gas springs are cali-brated to guarantee correctoperation with loading

specified by the manufacturer. Ar-bitrary additions to the boot lid(spoiler, etc.) may affect its oper-ation and safety.

fig. 144

A0B0743m

OPENING FROM INSIDE

To open the boot from inside the passen-ger compartment, pull the lever (A-fig.143), at the side of the driver’s seat.

fig. 143

A0B0042m

Only use the boot open-ing lever with the vehicle

stationary.

WARNING

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

147

CLOSING THE BOOT

To close the boot, lower it and press downabove the locking mechanism until it isheard to click into place.

BOOT LIGHTING (fig. 145)

Opening the boot, the light (A) in the up-per part of the boot turns on automatically.

The light goes out closing the boot or af-ter a few minutes (about 15) if the boot isleft open. In this case, to turn it on againclose the boot, then open it again.

fig. 145

A0B0241m

fig. 147

A0B0243m

fig. 146

A0B0242m

SECURING THE LOAD(fig. 146-147)

The load carried may be blocked withstraps hooked to the special rings in the bootcorners.

The rings also serve to secure the luggageretaining net (available upon request, forversions/markets where applicable) c/o Al-fa Romeo Authorized Services.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

148

BONNET

The lever used to open the bonnet is lo-cated under the left end of the dashboard.

To open:

– Pull the lever (A-fig. 148) until thebonnet clicks open.

CAUTIONS FOR CARRYING LUGGAGE

Travelling at night with a load in the bootit is necessary to adjust the height of the lowbeam headlights (see next paragraph“Headlights“ in this chapter). For correct useof the aiming device, also make sure thatthe load does not exceed the values givenin the same paragraph.

fig. 148

A0B0049m

Do not load the luggagecompartment above the

permitted maximum (see “Techni-cal specifications“). Also make surethat the objects contained in theboot are well secured to preventthem from being thrown forwardcausing harm to the passengers inthe event of sharp braking.

WARNING

A heavy load that has notbeen secured may cause

serious harm to passengers in theevent of an accident.

WARNING

When wanting to carry aspare can of petrol, this

must be done in compliance withthe law, only using a certified can,appropriately fastened to the loadrestraint eyelets. Even so, the riskof fire is increased.

WARNINGOnly with the car sta-

tionary.

WARNING

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

149

To close:

– lower the bonnet to approx. 20 cm fromthe engine compartment, then let it drop.Try lifting it to make sure that it is shut com-pletely and not simply caught in the safetyposition.

If the bonnet does not close properly, donot push it down but open it again and re-peat the above procedure.

– Press the safety lever (B-fig. 149)upwards.

– Raise the bonnet.

IMPORTANT Bonnet raising is aided bytwo gas springs. Do not tamper with thesesprings and accompany the bonnet whileraising it.

fig. 149

A0B0048m

Before lifting the bonnet,make sure that the wind-

screen wiper arms are not raisedfrom the windscreen.

WARNINGDANGER-SERIOUS IN-

JURY. When carrying outchecks or maintenance operationsin the engine compartment, takespecial care not to bump the headon the raised bonnet.

WARNING

Scarves, ties and looseclothing may be caught in

the moving parts causing seriousdamages.

WARNING

If checks need to be car-ried out in the engine com-

partment when the engine is stillwarm, keep away from the fan asit could start up even when the keyis removed from the ignition. Waituntil the engine cools down.

WARNING

For safety reasons thebonnet shall always be

perfectly closed when travelling.Always check for proper bonnetlocking. If the bonnet is left inad-vertently open, stop the car im-mediately and close the bonnet.

WARNING

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

150

ADJUSTINGTHE FRONT FOGLIGHTS

To adjust the height of the beam of thefront foglights, act on adjusting screw(A-fig. 151).

fig. 151

A0B0239m

Contact Alfa Romeo Au-thorized Services to havethe headlights correctly ad-

justed.

HEADLIGHTS

LIGHT BEAM AIMING

IMPORTANT The adjustment of theheadlights is vital to your safety and com-fort and to that of other road users. The ad-justment of the headlights is also governedby precise regulations. To guarantee both toyourself and to the other drivers the best vis-ibility conditions when travelling with theheadlights on, the vehicle must have itsheadlights properly adjusted. Contact AlfaRomeo Authorized Services to have theheadlights correctly adjusted.

COMPENSATION FOR TILT(fig. 150)

If the car is fitted with xenon headlights,beam aiming is electric and therefore con-trol (A) located on the plate at the side ofthe steering column is not present.

When the vehicle is loaded, the beam fromthe headlights is raised due to the back-wards tilt of the vehicle.

In this case the headlights must be ad-justed using control (A) located on the plateat the side of the steering column.

This control has four positions corre-sponding to various vehicle loads given be-low:

– position 0: 1 or 2 people occupyingfront seats, full fuel tank, on-board equip-ment present;

– position 1: 5 people on-board;

– position 2: 5 people on-board, luggagecompartment full (50 kg approximately);

– position 3: driver and 300 kg in lug-gage compartment.

fig. 150

A0B0240m

Check the positioning ofthe headlight beams every

time you change the load to be car-ried.

WARNING

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

151

GAS DISCHARGE HEADLIGHTS(optional for versions/marketswhere applicable)

The gas (xenon) discharge headlights op-erate with a voltaic arc, in an ambient sat-urated with pressure xenon, instead of theglow filament.

The resulting illumination is sensibly high-er to that of conventional lamps, both forlight quality (clearer light) and for the widthand positioning of the illuminated area.

The advantages of better illumination canbe perceived (due to less eyesight fatigueand greater orientation capacity for the dri-ver, which in turn means higher driving safe-ty) especially in case of bad weather, fogand/or insufficient road signs, thanks to thebetter illumination of the side parts of thevisual field, normally obscured.

The large increase of the side part illumi-nation increases driving safety since it allowsthe driver to better see the other users onthe edge of the road (pedestrians, cyclistsand bikers).

The triggering of the voltaic arc requires avery high voltage, while subsequent powersupply can take place at a low voltage.

The headlights achieve their top luminosi-ty approx. 15 seconds after they are switchedon.

The intense light produced by this type ofheadlights requires the use of an automat-ic system to keep headlight trim constantand avoid dazzling the vehicles coming fromthe opposite direction in case of braking, ac-celeration or when carrying loads.

The electromechanical system to auto-matically keep constant trim makes theheadlight tilt compensating device unnec-essary.

Xenon lights have a very long life, there-fore breakdowns are unlikely.

If necessary, have thesystem checked and re-

paired only by Alfa Romeo Autho-rized Services.

WARNING

DIPPED BEAM HEADLIGHT AIMING FOR LEFT-HAND/RIGHT-HAND DRIVING(only for versions with gasdischarge headlights)

As regards cars equipped with gas dis-charge headlights (xenon lamps)(optionalfor versions/markets where applicable) withvery great lighting power, when passingfrom a country with right-hand driving to onewith left-hand driving, or vice versa, it is nec-essary to modify the orientation of thedipped beam headlights, to optimize the il-lumination of the road edge and avoid daz-zling the vehicles coming from the oppositedirection.

To have this operationcarried out, contact AlfaRomeo Authorized Ser-

vices.

When you go back toyour country of origin, re-

member to have the dipped beamheadlight orientation modifiedagain.

WARNING

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

152

In the event of a failure, though being un-able to rely on the antilock effect, there is ab-solutely no adverse effect on vehicle brak-ing performance in terms of braking capacity.

If you have never used a car with ABS be-fore, you are advised to learn how to useit with a few preliminary trials on a slipperysurface, naturally under safety conditionsand fully adhering to the Highway Code ofthe country concerned. You are also advisedto carefully read the following information.

The advantage of the ABS compared withthe conventional system is that it makes itpossible to maintain maximum vehicle han-dling performance also in the case of hardbraking under grip limit conditions, avoid-ing wheel lock.

Do not however expect the braking dis-tance always to be reduced with the ABSsystem: for example, on soft surfaces suchas gravel or fresh snow on slippery surfaces,the distance might increase.

ABS

The car is fitted with an ABS system whichprevents wheel lock when braking, betterexploits wheel grip and keeps the vehiclecontrollable within the limits of the availablegrip also during emergency braking.

The driver can feel that the ABS is opera-tional by a light pulsing of the brake ped-al, accompanied by noise.

This should not interpreted as malfunc-tioning of the brakes, but it is the signal tothe driver that the ABS system is working:it is the warning that the car is travelling atthe limit of grip an that, therefore, it is nec-essary to adapt the speed to the type of roadon which you are travelling.

The ABS system is an additional part of thebasic braking system; in the event of a faultit is disabled, leaving the braking systemin the same conditions as a car without ABS.

In order to be able to exploit as far as pos-sible the possibility of the antilock systemin the case of need, it is wise to follow a fewpieces of advice:

If the ABS cuts in, itmeans that the grip limit

between the tyres and the roadsurface has been reached: it is nec-essary to slow down and adaptdriving to the grip available.

WARNING

The ABS exploits theavailable grip in full, but it

cannot increase it; therefore, cau-tion is required on slippery sur-faces, without running unnecessary

WARNING

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

153

The most important piece of advice, how-ever, is the following:

Following these instructions you will bein a condition to obtain peak braking per-formance at all times.

IMPORTANT Cars fitted with ABS mustonly be fitted with wheel rims, tyres and brakelinings of the type and brand approved by theManufacturer.

The braking system is completed by theelectronic control braking distribution systemcalled EBD (Electronic Braking Force Distrib-utor) which distributes the braking actionthrough the ABS system control unit and sen-sors.

Braking on corners always requires the ut-most caution, even with the help of the ABS.

When the ABS cuts in andyou feel the pedal pulse, do

not reduce the pressure, but keepthe brake pedal firmly pressedwith no fear; this way you willstop in the shortest possible space,compatibly with the conditions ofthe road surface.

WARNING

The car is fitted with anelectronic brake distributor

(EBD). If the > and x warninglights come on at the same time(together with the message + sym-bol shown by the display) whenthe engine is running, there is anEBD system fault; in this case, vi-olent braking may lock the rearwheels too early, with the possi-bility of skidding. Drive extreme-ly carefully to the nearest AlfaRomeo Authorized Services tohave the system checked over.

WARNING

If the x low brake fluidwarning light comes on (to-

gether with the message + symbolshown by the display), stop the carimmediately and contact the near-est Alfa Romeo Authorized Ser-vices. Indeed, any leak of fluidfrom the hydraulic system com-promises the effectiveness of boththe conventional brake system andthe system with antilock system.

WARNINGIn the event of a system

fault, with lighting up of the>warning light on the instrumentcluster (together with the message+ symbol shown by the display),have the vehicle checked immedi-ately by Alfa Romeo AuthorizedServices, driving slowly to be ableto regain full system performance.

WARNING

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

154

ASR SYSTEM (Antislip Regulation)

The ASR function controls the vehicle dri-ve and cuts in automatically every time oneor both driving wheels slip.

In slipping conditions, two different controlsystems are activated:

1) if slipping involves both driving wheels,being caused by excessive power transmit-ted, the ASR device cuts in reducing the pow-er transmitted by the engine.

2) if slipping involves only one drivingwheel, the ASR system cuts in automatical-ly braking the wheel that is slipping, withan effect similar to that of a self-locking dif-ferential.

The action of the ASR is particularly help-ful in the following circumstances:

– slipping of the inner wheel on a bend,due to the effect of dynamic load changesor excessive acceleration.

– too much power transmitted to thewheels also in relation to the conditions ofthe road surface.

– acceleration on slippery, snowy or frozensurfaces.

– in the case of loss of grip on a wet sur-face (aquaplaning).

The turning on of the >warning light (together

with the message + symbol shownby the display) with the enginerunning normally indicates an ABSsystem fault. In this case the brak-ing system preserves its effec-tiveness, without however makinguse of the antilock device. Underthese circumstances, the EBD sys-tem may fail to give top perfor-mance. In this case, too, you arerecommended to contact AlfaRomeo Authorized Services imme-diately, driving in such a way as toavoid abrupt braking, to have thesystem checked.

ATTENZIONE

The performance of thesystem in terms of active

safety should not induce the driverto take pointless and unnecessaryrisks. The style of driving must inany case be adapted to the condi-tions of the road surface, visibili-ty and traffic. Road safety is al-ways the driver’s responsibility.

WARNING

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

155

SWITCHING ON THE ASRFUNCTION

The ASR function switches on automati-cally each time the engine is started.

When travelling the device can be switchedoff and on again pressing switch (A-fig. 152) on the centre console.

When the device is switched off this isshown by the lighting up of the led on thebutton, by the V warning light on the in-strument panel turn on and by the messageASR OFF on Infocenter display. If the func-tion is switched off when travelling, it willturn on again automatically the next timethe engine is started.

For correct operation of the ASR systemthe tyres must absolutely be of the samebrand and type on all wheels, in perfectconditions and above all, of the specifiedtype, brand and size.

IMPORTANT When travelling on snowwith snow chains, it may be helpful to turnthe ASR device off: in fact, in these condi-tions, slipping of the driving wheels whenmoving off makes it possible to obtain bet-ter drive.

ASR system failure warning

In the event of a fault, the ASR systemswitches off automatically and the Vwarn-ing light on the instrument cluster turns onwith fixed light, together with the message“ASR OFF” on the Infocenter display andbutton led (A-fig. 152).

In the event of an ASR system operatingfailure, the car behaves in the same wayas a car that is not fitted with this system:in any case, it is advisable to contact AlfaRomeo Authorised Services as soon as pos-sible.

MSR system (Enginedrive adjustment)

The car is fitted with a special system, in-tegral with the ASR system, that in case ofsudden gear shifting, cuts in providing torqueto the engine thus preventing excessive dri-ving wheel drive that, specially in poor gripconditions could lead to loss of stability.

ABD system

This system, integral with the ASR system,enables to modulate in a combined modethe pressure inside the brake circuit actingon driving wheels and the engine torque.The action of the ABD system is particular-ly helpful when driving uphill with drivingwheels under different grip conditions, i.e.:poor grip on one side and good grip on theother side.

fig. 152

A0B0286m

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

156

EOBD SYSTEM

The EOBD (European On Board Diagnosis)system fitted in the car conforms with theEC 98/69 (EURO 3) Directive.

This system continuously monitors the com-ponents of the vehicle related to emissions;it also indicates, when the warning light Ucomes on on the instrument panel (togetherwith the message + symbol shown by the dis-play) that the components in question are inpoor conditions.

The objective is the following:– to keep under control the efficiency of

the system;– to indicate when a malfunction causes

an increase in the emissions beyond thethreshold established by European regula-tions;

– to indicate the need to replace the de-teriorated components.

The system also has a diagnostic connec-tor, which can be interfaced with adequate in-struments, that enables the error codes storedin the control unit to be read, together witha series of specific parameters concerning theoperation and diagnosis of the engine. Thischeck can also be made by the traffic con-trol agents.

If, when the ignition keyis turned to MAR, the Uwarning light does not

come on or if, when driving, itlights up and emits a fixed light ora flashing one (together with themessage + symbol shown by thedisplay), contact an Alfa RomeoAuthorized Service Station as soonas possible. The operation of theU warning light can also bechecked by means of special equip-ment available to the traffic con-trol officers. Comply with the reg-ulations in force in country whereyou drive your car.

IMPORTANT After the problem has beelresolved, to completely check the system,the Alfa Romeo Authorized Service Stationmust carry out tests on a test bench and, ifnecessary, road tests that could be long.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

157

SOUND SYSTEM

The fixed sound system with CD playerwith parametric sound equalizer has beendesigned to suit the specific characteristicsof the passenger compartment, with a per-sonalised design that matches the style ofthe dashboard. The sound system instruc-tions for use are described in the attachedsupplement.

SOUND SYSTEMPRESETTING SYSTEM(for versions/markets whereapplicable)

The car, if not delivered with sound sys-tem, is fitted with a glove compartment(fig. 153) on the instrument panel.

Sound system presetting system includesthe following:

– sound system power cables;

– front and rear speaker power cables;

– aerial power cable;

– sound system housing;

– aerial on car roof (where provided).

fig. 153

A0B742m

fig. 154

A0B741m

The sound system shall be installed in theproper housing occupied by the glove com-partment that can be removed by pressingthe two retaining tabs in the glove com-partment: here are the power cables.

If after buying the car youwant to install the soundsystem, contact first Alfa

Romeo Authorised Services whosequalified personnel, in addition tosuggesting the most suitable de-vices, will evaluate the overallelectric absorption to safeguard thebattery. Excessive loadless ab-sorption could damage the batteryand lose warranty.

The wiring diagram is the following (fig.154):

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

158

REFUELLING In order to prevent the vehicle being filledwith leaded petrol, the diameter of the fillerneck is smaller than the nozzle used onpumps delivering leaded petrol.

The anti-pollution devicespresent on the vehicle im-pose the use of four-star

unleaded fuel with an octane num-ber (R.O.N.) above 95.

Under no circumstancesshould conventional leadedpetrol be used, as this

would irreparably damage the cat-alyst. If the tank is accidentallyfilled with leaded fuel, even inminute quantities, DO NOT STARTTHE ENGINE. Do not attempt to di-lute the petrol with lead free fuel.Drain the entire fuel circuit andtank.

If the catalyst is notworking properly, harmfulemissions reach the ex-

haust, resulting in environment pol-lution.

Connector A

A1 N.C.

A2 N.C.

A3 N.C.

A4 + 30 (battery-powered)

A5 Aerial power supply

A6 Light

A7 + 15 (key-powered)

A8 Ground

Connector B

B1 RH rear speaker

B2 RH rear speaker

B3 RH front speaker

B4 RH front speaker

B5 LH front speaker

B6 LH front speaker

B7 LH rear speaker

B8 LH rear speaker

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

159

FUEL CAP

The fuel flap is released from inside thecar, raising the front part of the lever (A-fig. 155).

The fuel cap (A-fig. 156) has a catchto prevent misplacing it (B) that fastens itto the flap (C).

IMPORTANT The fuel tank is sealed her-metically and pressure may build up inside.Any noise of rushing air when the cap is re-moved is perfectly normal.

IMPORTANT For your safety, make surethat the fuelling pump nozzle is inserted cor-rectly into the housing, before starting theengine.

Do not get near the fuelfiller with naked flames or

lit cigarettes: danger of fire.Also avoid going too near the

filler with the face to avoid inhal-ing harmful vapours.

WARNING

In case of need, replacethe fuel cap only with anoriginal one; otherwise,

the efficiency of the petrol vapourrecovery system could be badly af-fected.

fig. 156

A0B0045m

fig. 155

A0B0044m

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

160

EMERGENCY FLAPOPENING DEVICE

If the lever (A-fig. 155) fails to work,it is still possible to open the flap by pullingthe cord (A-fig. 157) on the right-handside of the luggage compartment.

ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION

The design and construction of the vehi-cle have not only been developed with thetraditional aspects of performance and safe-ty in mind, but also take into account the in-creasingly pressing problems tied to pro-tecting the environment.

The choice of materials, techniques andparticular devices are the result of workwhich has made it possible to drastically re-duce the harmful effects on the environmentand guarantee respect for the severest in-ternational norms.

fig. 157

A0B0388m

USE OF NON-TOXICMATERIALS

None of the components of the vehicle con-tains asbestos. The padding and the climatecontrol system do not contain CFCs whichare held to be responsible for the depletionof the ozone layer.

The colouring agents and the corrosion in-hibitors used on the nuts, screws and boltsdo not contain cadmium any more, whichcould pollute the atmosphere and water ta-bles.

GET

TIN

G T

O K

NO

W Y

OUR C

AR

161

EMISSION REDUCING DEVICES

Trivalent catalytic converter (catalytic silencer)

The exhaust system is fitted with a cat-alyzer formed of alloys of noble metals. Itis housed in a stainless steel container whichis able to resist the high operating temper-atures.

The catalyzer converts the unburnt hydro-carbons, carbon monoxide and nitrogen ox-ides present in the exhaust gas (even if insmall quantities thanks to the electronic in-jection and ignition system) into harmlesscompounds.

Lambda probes

The sensors (lambda probe) measures thecontent of oxygen present in the exhaustgas. The signal transmitted by the lambdaprobe is use by the injection and ignitionelectronic control unit to adjust the air-fuelmixture.

Anti-evaporation system

As it is impossible, even when the engineis switched off, to prevent the formation offuel vapours, a system has been devisedwhich “imprisons“ the vapours in a specialactivated carbon container.

During operation of the engine, thesevapours are sucked up and sent to com-bustion.

Due to the high tempera-tures reached during oper-

ation of the catalytic converter, thevehicle should not be parked overinflammable materials (paper, fu-el oils, grass, dry leaves, etc.).

WARNING

CO

RREC

T USE

OF

THE

CAR

162

STARTING OPERATION

IMPORTANT It is important not to pressthe accelerator until the engine has started.

1) Make sure the handbrake is engaged.

2) Move the gear lever to neutral.

3) Fully depress the clutch pedal so thatthe starter motor is not forced to crank thetoothed wheels of the gearbox.

4) Ensure that the systems and electricaldevices, especially if they absorb high quan-tities of energy (e.g. heated rear wind-screen) are switched off.

5) Turn the ignition to the AVV positionand release it as soon as the engine starts.

6) If the engine does not start, return thekey to the STOP position and repeat theoperation.

The ignition switch is fitted with a safetydevice which obliges the driver to return theignition key to the STOP position before re-peating the starting operation if the enginedoes not start immediately.

Similarly, when the engine is running, thedevice prevents the key being moved fromthe MAR to the AVV position.

STARTINGTHE ENGINE

IMPORTANT The car is fitted with anelectronic engine lock device. If the enginefails to start see “Alfa Romeo CODE sy-stem“.

CCOORRRREECCTT UUSSEE OOFF TTHHEE CCAARR

In addition to the notesand specifications given be-low we recommend that,

during the initial period, you do notdrive to full vehicle performance(for example excessive accelera-tion, long journeys at top speed,hard braking, etc.).

To avoid useless con-sumption of power andpossible draining the bat-

tery, never leave the ignition keyin the MAR position when the en-gine is not running.

Running the engine in con-fined areas is extremely

dangerous. The engine consumesoxygen and produces carbon mo-noxide which is a highly toxic andlethal gas.

WARNING

CO

RREC

T USE

OF

THE

CAR

163

For vehicles equippedwith turbocharger in parti-cular and for other vehicles

in general, revving the engine befo-re switching off should be avoided.Revving the engine serves no pur-pose and consumes fuel for no rea-son. It may also cause damage tothe bearings on the rotor of theturbocharger.

IMPORTANT If the engine turns off withthe car on the move, the next time it is star-ted, the Alfa Romeo CODE warning light(¢) may turn on. In this case, check thatswitching off and starting the engine againwith the car stationary, the warning lightstays off. If not, contact Alfa Romeo Autho-rized Services.

IMPORTANT If it is difficult to start theengine do not insist with extended attemptswhich may damage the catalyzer but con-tact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

IMPORTANT On versions equipped withSelespeed gearbox, keep the brake pedalpressed when starting the engine. As thebrake pedal stiffens if it is pressed repeatedlywith the engine off, in this situation, to al-low the engine to be started, it is necessaryto increase the pressure exerted on the pe-dal itself.

WARMING THE ENGINE

– Drive off slowly, at medium revs withoutaccelerating abruptly.

– Do not drive at full performance for theinitial kilometers of the journey, Wait untilthe engine coolant temperature is between50 and 60 °C.

SWITCHING OFF

– Release the accelerator pedal and waituntil the engine reaches idle speed.

– Turn the ignition key to the STOP po-sition and switch off the engine.

IMPORTANT After a taxing drive it isbetter to allow the engine to “catch itsbreath“ before turning it off by letting it id-le to allow the temperature in the enginecompartment to fall.

CO

RREC

T USE

OF

THE

CAR

164

EMERGENCY STARTING

If the Alfa Romeo CODE system does notrecognise the code transmitted by the igni-tion key (Alfa Romeo CODE (¢) warninglight on the instrument cluster on glowingsteadily) emergency starting may be carriedout using the code of the CODE card.

For the correct procedure see the chapter“In an emergency“.

PARKING

When the vehicle is parked, proceed as fol-lows:

– Switch off the engine.

– Engage the handbrake.

– Engage first gear if the car is facing uphillor reverse if the car is facing downhill.

– Turn the front wheels so that the car willimmediately come to a half if the handbrakeslips.Starting by pushing,

towing or running downhillmust absolutely be avoi-

ded. These manoeuvres may causefuel to flow into the catalyst anddamage it irreparably. To avoid useless con-

sumption of power andpossible draining the bat-

tery, never leave the ignition keyin the MAR position when the en-gine is not running.

SAFE DRIVING

In designing your Alfa 156 GTA, Al-fa Romeo has worked thoroughly to achie-ve a vehicle able to offer top levels of safetyto its passengers. However, the behaviourof the driver is still a decisive factor for roadsafety.

Below you will find a few simple rules fortravelling safely under different conditions.You are certainly familiar with many of thembut it is still helpful to read them all care-fully.

BEFORE DRIVING OFF

– Make sure the lights and headlights areworking properly.

– Adjust the seat, steering wheel and rear-view mirrors, in order to obtain a correct po-sition for driving.

– Adjust the seat back upright and keepyour head as close as possible to the headrestraint.

– Check that nothing (mats, etc.) can getunder the foot pedals.Never leave children unat-

tended in the car. Alwaysremove the key from the ignitionwhen leaving the car and take itwith you.

WARNINGRemember that the servo-brake and power steering

are not activated until the engineis started, therefore considerablygreater effort is required on thebrake pedal and steering wheel.

WARNING

CO

RREC

T USE

OF

THE

CAR

165

– Make sure that any child restraint sy-stem (seats, cradles, etc.) are correctly fa-stened on the rear seat.

– Place any objects in the boot with careto prevent abrupt braking from throwingthem forwards.

– Avoid heavy meals before a journey. Alight meal will help to keep reflexes ready.Above all avoid alcohol.

Routinely remember to check:

– tyre pressure and conditions;

– engine oil level;

– engine coolant level and system condi-tions;

– brake fluid level;

– power steering oil level;

– windscreen washer fluid level.

WHEN TRAVELLING

– The first rule for safe driving is care.

– Care also means being able to predictthe actions of other road users.

– Strictly respect the traffic regulations inall countries, especially the speed limits.

– Ensure that both yourself and your pas-sengers are wearing their seat belts, thatchildren are carried with the appropriateseats and that any animals are in appro-priate compartments.

– Long distances should be trackled ingood health.

Driving under the influenceof drugs and/or some me-

dicines is highly dangerous for one-self and for others.

WARNINGNever drive with objectson the floor in front of the

driver’s seat: they might get stuckunder the pedals making it impos-sible to accelerate or brake.

WARNING

Always fasten the frontand rear seat belts inclu-

ding those of any child’s seat. Tra-velling without seat belts increa-ses the risks of serious injury oreven death in the event of an ac-cident.

WARNING

Take care when fitting ad-ditional spoilers, alloy

wheels and wheel caps: they mi-ght reduce ventilation of thebrakes, thus their efficiency, duringabrupt and repeated braking, orlong downhill slopes.

WARNING

CO

RREC

T USE

OF

THE

CAR

166

NIGHT DRIVING

Here are some suggestions for night dri-ving.

– Drive with particular care: night drivinginvolves a greater degree of concentration.

– Reduce speed, especially on unlit roads.

– At the first signs of drowsiness stop thecar: continuing the journey is dangerous foryourself and others. Continue driving onlyafter sufficient rest.

– Maintain a greater distance from thevehicle in front than in the day: it is moredifficult to judge the speed of the vehiclewhen only the lights can be seen.

– Ensure that the headlights are correctlyaligned: if they are too low, visibility is re-duced and eyesight is tired. If they are toohigh they may cause disturbance to otherroad users.

– Use the main beams only outside built-up areas and only when you are certain thatother drivers are not disturbed by their use.

– When meeting vehicles coming in theopposite direction, switch off the mainbeams and drive with the dipped-beamheadlights on.

– Do not drive for long periods without abreak. During breaks get out of the vehicleand move around a bit to shake off thedrowsiness.

– Make sure the air in the passenger com-partment is changed constantly.

– Never coast the vehicle downhill withthe engine switched off as this eliminatesthe engine braking and power steering ef-fect thus requiring a greater effort on the pe-dal and steering wheel.

– Keep headlights and lights clean.

– Outside built-up areas take care of ani-mal crossings.

DRIVING IN THE RAIN

Rain and wet roads can be dangerous.

If the road is wet, the traction betweenwheel and asphalt is greatly reduced, thusincreasing the stopping distance and de-creasing road holding.

Here are few suggestions in the case ofrain:

– Reduce speed and keep further backfrom the vehicle in front.

– If it is raining particularly heavily, visi-bility is also reduced. In these cases, swit-ch on the dipped headlights even if it is stilldaylight so you can be seen more easily.

– Do not drive through puddles at speedand hold on tightly to the wheel if you do:a puddle taken at high speed might causeyou to lose control of the car (“aquapla-ning“).

Make sure any mats areappropriate in size: even a

slight inconvenience to the brakingsystem may require a higher pedalstroke than normal.

WARNING

Water, ice and salt on theroads may deposit on the

brake discs, reducing the effecti-veness of the brakes the first timethey are used.

WARNING

CO

RREC

T USE

OF

THE

CAR

167

DRIVING ON SNOW AND ICE

Here are few suggestions for driving in the-se conditions:

– Keep your speed down.

– On a snowy road, fit winter tyres orsnow chains; see the related paragraphs inthis section.

– Use exhaust brake where possible andavoid abrupt braking.

– Avoid abrupt acceleration and changesof direction.

– During cold weather even apparently dryroads may be covered with occasional pat-ches of ice. Pay great attention thereforewhen driving on roads which are in the sha-de, or where rocks or trees line the road andon which ice may persist.

– Keep further back from the vehicle infront.

– Position the ventilation controls for de-misting (see chapter “Getting to know yourcar“), to prevent visibility from worsening.

– Routinely check the conditions of thewindscreen wiper blades.

DRIVING IN THE FOG

– If fog is very thick, avoid travelling whe-re possible. If travelling with mist, groundfog or the possibility of fog banks:

– Drive at moderate speed.

– Also in the day turn on the dipped-beamheadlights, rear fog guards and front fog li-ghts. Do not use the main beam headlights.

IMPORTANT On stretches of road withgood visibility, switch off your rear foglights;the brightness of these lights could annoythe people travelling in the cars behind.

– Remember that fog also involves wetasphalt, thus greater difficulty in all types ofmanoeuvres and longer stopping distances.

– Keep well away from the vehicle infront.

– Where possible avoid sudden changesin speed.

– Possibly avoid overtaking other vehicles.

– If the vehicle is forced to stop (faults,impossibility to continue due to poor visibi-lity, etc.), firstly try to pull off the road. Thenturn on the hazard warning lights and, if pos-sible the dipped beam headlights. Rythmi-cally sound the horn if you note another carcoming.

MOUNTAIN DRIVING

– When driving downhill, use the enginebraking by engaging a low gear, to preventthe brakes from overheating.

– Never coast downhill with the engine offor in neutral and especially not with the igni-tion key removed.

– Drive at moderate speed and avoid “cut-ting“ corners.

– Remember that overtaking up hill isslower and therefore requires a greaterlength of clear road. If you are being over-taken on a hill, move over to enable theother vehicle to pass in safety.

CO

RREC

T USE

OF

THE

CAR

168

DRIVING WITH ABS

The ABS is a part of the braking systemwhich essentially offers two advantages:

1) It prevents wheel lock-up and conse-quent skidding in emergency stops, parti-cularly when the road does not offer muchgrip;

2) It makes it possible to brake and steerat the same time so you can avoid unex-pected obstacles and direct the car whereyou want while braking. The extent to whi-ch this can be done will depend on the phy-sical limits of the tyre’s sideways grip.

To make the most of the ABS:

– In emergency braking or when grip islow, a slight pulsing can be felt on the brakepedal: this means that the ABS has come in-to action. Do not release the pedal, but con-tinue pressing it to give continuity to thebraking action.

– The ABS prevents the wheels fromlocking but it does not increase the physi-cal limits of grip between the asphalt andthe road. Therefore, also with a car fittedwith ABS, keep within a safety distance fromthe vehicle in front and limit speed when ap-proaching bends.

The ABS serves to increase car controlla-bilty not to go faster.

REDUCING RUNNINGCOSTS ANDENVIRONMENTPOLLUTION

Some suggestions which may help you tokeep the running costs of your vehicle downand lower the amount of toxic emissions re-leased into the atmosphere are given below.

GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS

Vehicle maintenance

The overall state of the vehicle is an im-portant factor which has a marked influen-ce over fuel consumption and driving comfortand on the life span of your vehicle. For thisreason care should be taken to maintainyour vehicle by carrying out the necessarychecks and regulations in accordance withspecifications given in the “Scheduled Main-tenance Programme“ (see sections... sparkplugs, air cleaner, timing).

Tyres

Tyres should be checked at least every four4 weeks: if the pressure is too low, fuel con-sumption increases as the resistance to therolling movement of the tyre is higher. Inthis state, tyre wear is increased and vehicle handling suffers which will af-fect safety.

Unnecessary loads

Do not travel with too much luggagestowed in the boot. The weight of the vehi-cle (especially when driving in town) and itstrim greatly affects consumption and stabi-lity.

CO

RREC

T USE

OF

THE

CAR

169

Electrical devices

Use the electric devices for the necessarytime only. The heated rear window, sup-plementary lights, windscreen wipers, hea-ting system blower require large amounts ofenergy and, increasing the request for poweralso increases fuel consumption (up to+25% when driving in built-up areas).

Air conditioner

The air conditioner is an additional loadwhich greatly affects the engine leading tohigher consumption (on average up to+20%). When the temperature outside thevehicle permits it, use the air vents wherepossible.

Spoilers

The use of aerodynamic optional extraswhich are not certified for the specific useon the vehicle, may reduce the aerodyna-mic penetration of the vehicle and increaseconsumption.

STYLE OF DRIVING

Starting

Do not warm the engine when the vehicleis stationary or at high or low revs: in thisway the engine will warm up gradually in-creasing consumption and emissions. Youshould drive off slowly straight away avoi-ding high revs so that the engine will warmup more quickly.

Unnecessary actions

Avoid revving the engine when stopped attraffic lights or before switching off the en-gine and avoid doubling the clutch as the-se actions have no purpose on modern vehi-cles and serve only to increase consumptionand pollution.

Gear selection

As soon as the traffic and road conditionsallow it, shift to a higher gear. Using a lowergear to liven up acceleration greatly increa-ses consumption. In the same way, impro-per use of the higher gears will increase con-sumption, emissions and wear and tear onthe engine.

Maximum speed

Fuel consumption increases considerablyas speed increases. For example, when ac-celerating from 90 to 120 kph, fuel con-sumption increases by about +30%. Yourspeed should be kept as even as possibleand superfluous braking and accelerationavoided as this increases both consumptionand emissions. A “soft“ way of drivingshould be adopted by attempting to antici-pate manoeuvres to avoid imminent dangerand to keep a safe distance from the vehi-cle in front in order to avoid braking sharply.

Acceleration

Accelerating violently increasing the revswill greatly affect consumption and emis-sions: acceleration should be gradual andshould not exceed the maximum torque.

CO

RREC

T USE

OF

THE

CAR

170

CONDITIONS OF USE

Cold starting

Short journeys and frequent cold startingwill not enable the engine to reach optimalrunning temperature. It follows thereforethat consumption will be higher (from +15%to +30% in built-up areas) as will the pro-duction of toxic emissions.

Traffic and road conditions

heavy traffic and higher consumption aresynonymous; for example, when drivingslowly with frequent use of lower gears orin large towns where there are numeroustraffic lights.

Winding roads, mountain roads andbumpy roads also have a negative effect onconsumption.

Enforced halts

During prolonged hold-ups (traffic lights,level crossings) the engine should be swit-ched off.

ECONOMY AND ENVIRONMENT-FRIENDLY DRIVING

Environment protection is one of the prin-ciples that guided the development of yourAlfa 156 GTA.

It is not merely by chance that its antipol-lution devices obtain results far beyond tho-se specified by current regulations.

The environment, however, still needs theutmost care from all of us.

By following few simple rules it is possibleto avoid damage to the environment andvery often at the same time to limit fuel con-sumption. On this subject we are giving so-me helpful suggestions to be added to tho-se marked with the #, in various points ofthis manual.

Kindly read them all carefully.

PROTECTING EMISSIONREDUCING DEVICES

Correct operation of the antipollution de-vices not only guarantees respect for the en-vironment but also influences car perfor-mance. Keeping these devices in goodcondition is therefore the first rule for bothenvironment-friendly and economy driving.

The first precaution is to closely follow the“Programmed Maintenance Schedule“. Forpetrol engines only use unleaded petrol (95RON).

If difficulty with starting is experienced donot insist with extended attempts. Especiallyavoid bump, tow or coast starts: these mayall damage the catalyst. Only use an auxi-liary battery to start the car in an emergency.

CO

RREC

T USE

OF

THE

CAR

171

TOWING TRAILERSThe car cannot towing trailers.

If the engine is “not running smoothly“,when the vehicle is travelling, reduce the re-quest for performance to a minimum andcontact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services assoon as possible.

When the fuel reserve warning light comeson fill up as soon as possible. A low fuel le-vel may cause an irregular supply to the en-gine with inevitable increase of the exhau-st gas temperature; this would result inserious damage to the catalyst.

Never run the engine, even as a test, withone or more spark plugs disconnected. Donot warm the engine at idle speed beforemoving off, unless the outside temperatu-re is very low and, in this case too, for nomore than 30 seconds.

Do not install other heatguards and do not remove

the existing ones on the catalystand exhaust pipe.

WARNING

Do not spray anything onthe catalyst, lambda sen-

sor and exhaust pipe.

WARNING

The failure to follow the-se rules may cause a fire

hazard.

WARNING

During normal service thecatalyst reaches high tem-

peratures. Do not therefore parkthe car over inflammable materials(grass, dry leaves, pine needles,etc.): fire hazard.

WARNING

CO

RREC

T USE

OF

THE

CAR

172

IMPORTANT When snow tyres are usedwith a max. speed index below the one thatcan be reached by the car (increased by 5%),place a notice in the passenger compartment,plainly in the driver’s view which states themax. permissible speed of the snow tyres (asper EC Directive).

All four tyres should be the same (brand andtrack) to ensure greater safety when drivingand braking and better driveability.

Remember that it is inappropriate to chan-ge the direction of rotation of tyres.

WINTER TYRES

These tyres are specially designed for dri-ving on snow and ice, to be fitted in placeof the existing tyres.

Use snow tyres of the same size as the nor-mal tyres provided with the car.

Alfa Romeo Authorized Services will beglad to provide advice concerning the mostsuitable type of tyre for the customer’s re-quirements.

For the type of tyre to be used, inflationpressures and the specifications of snow ty-res, follow the instructions given in chapter“Technical specifications“.

The winter features of these tyres are re-duced considerably when the tread depthis below 4 mm. In this case, they should bereplaced. Due to the snow tyre features, un-der normal conditions of use or on long mo-torway journeys, the performance of thesetyres is lower than that of normal tyres.

It is therefore necessary to limit their use tothe purposes for which they are certified.

SNOW CHAINS

Use of snow chains should be in com-pliance with local regulations.

Use snow chains with reduced size withmax. protrusion beyond the tyre profile of12 mm.

Snow chains may not beused on tyres type225/45 ZR 17". Only spi-

der type chains can be used on ty-res type 215/45 R17” and215/45 ZR17”. SPIKES SPIDERCOMPACT snow chains (17003compact model) with 9 arms and16 mm adjustable length and 17"wheel cover adapter are availableat Lineaccessori Alfa Romeo. Keepyour speed down when this typeof chains is fitted. Do not exceed50 km/h with this type of chains,avoid sudden acceleration anddeactivate the ASR system (thewarning light on the button shallbe on). Remember that snowchains make braking distance lon-ger.

The max. speed for snowtyres with “Q“ marking is

160 km/h; 190 km/h for tyreswith “T“ marking and 210 km/hfor tyres with “H“ marking. TheRoad Traffic Code speed limits mu-st however be always strictly ob-served.

WARNING

CO

RREC

T USE

OF

THE

CAR

173

Keep your speeddown when snowchains are fitted.

Do not exceed 50 km/h. Avoidpotholes, steps and pavements andavoid also to drive for long di-stances on roads not covered withsnow to prevent damaging the carand the roadbed.

VEHICLE INACTIVITY

If the car is to be left inactive for long pe-riods, the following precautions should benoted:

– House the vehicle under cover in a dryand possibly ventilated place.

– Engage a gear.

– Check that the handbrake is not enga-ged.

– Clean and protect the painted partsusing protective wax.

– Disconnect the negative terminal (–)and check the battery charge. This check isto be repeated every three months. Re-charge if the optical indicator shows a darkcolour without the central green area.

IMPORTANT Switch off the electroniccar alarm with the remote control.

– Clean and protect the shiny metal partsusing special compounds readily available.

– Sprinkle talcum powder on the rubberwindscreen and rear window wiper bladesand lift them off the glass.

– Slightly open the windows.

– Cover the car with a cloth or perfora-ted plastic sheet. Do not use sheets of non-perforated plastic as they do not allow moi-sture on the car body to evaporate.

– Inflate the tyres to 0.5 bar above thenormal specified pressure and check it at in-tervals.

– If you don’t disconnect the battery fromthe electric system, check its charge everymonth and recharge it if the optical indica-tor shows a dark colour without the centralgreen area.

– Do not drain the engine cooling system.

Snow chains should only be applied to thedriving wheels (front wheels).

Alfa Romeo Authorized Services should fir-st be contacted before purchasing or usingsnow chains.

Check the tension of the chains after thefirst few metres have been driven.

CO

RREC

T USE

OF

THE

CAR

174

USEFUL ACCESSORIES

In addition to the legal requirements, werecommend keeping the following in the car(fig. 1):

– first aid kit with non-alcoholic base di-sinfectant, steril gauzes, a roll of gauze, pla-sters, etc.;

– torch;

– round-ended scissors;

– work gloves.

fig. 1

A0B0389m

REMOVING FROM STORAGE

Before using your vehicle after a long pe-riod of inactivity, the following operationsshould first be carried out:

– Do not dust the outside of the vehicle.

– Visually check that there are no leaks(oil, brake and clutch fluid, engine coolant,etc.).

– Replace engine oil and filter.

– Check:- brake-clutch fluid level- level of engine coolant fluid.

– Check the air cleaner and replace if ne-cessary.

– Check tyre pressure and ensure that theyare not damaged, cracked or cut. If they arethey must be replaced.

– Check the state of the drive belts.

– Reconnect the battery negative termi-nal (–) after checking that the charge isadequate.

– With the gear lever in neutral start theengine and allow the engine to run for a fewseconds whilst repeatedly working the clut-ch pedal.

This operation must beperformed in the open. The

exhaust gases contain carbon mo-noxide which is extremely toxicand may also be lethal.

WARNING

IN A

N E

MER

GEN

CY

175

3) Fully depress the accelerator pedal andkeep it pressed. The warning light U willcome on for eight seconds approximatelyand will then go out; now release the ac-celerator pedal.

4) The warning light U begins to flash:after it has flashed for the same number oftimes as the first digit on the code of thecard, press completely and hold down theaccelerator pedal until the warning light Ucomes on (for 4 seconds) and then goes outagain; now release the accelerator pedal.

5) The warning light U will begin toflash: after it has flashed for the same num-ber of times as the second digit on the codeof the card, press completely and hold downthe accelerator pedal.

6) Repeat this procedure in the same wayfor the other digits on the CODE card code.

7) After entering the last figure, keep theaccelerator pedal pressed. The warning lightU turns on (for four seconds) and then goesoff; now release the accelerator pedal.

8) A quick flash of the warning light U(for appr. 4 seconds) confirms that the op-eration has taken place correctly.

9) Start the car turning the ignition keyfrom the MAR position to the AVV posi-tion without returning the key to the STOPposition.

Conversely, if the warning light U stayson, turn the ignition key to STOP and re-peat the procedure starting from point 1).

IMPORTANT After emergency startingit is advisable to turn to an Alfa Romeo Au-thorized Service, because the procedure de-scribed must be repeated each time the en-gine is started.

EMERGENCYSTARTING

If the Alfa Romeo CODE system is not ableto deactivate the engine inhibitor, warninglights¢ andU remain lit and the enginecannot be started. To start the engine it isnecessary to follow the emergency startingprocedure.

IMPORTANT You are advised to care-fully read the entire procedure before car-rying it out.

If a mistake is made during the emergencyprocedure, the ignition key should be turnedto STOP and the operations must be re-peated from the start (point 1).

1) Read the 5-figure electronic code onthe CODE card.

2) Turn the ignition key to the MAR po-sition.

IINN AANN EEMMEERRGGEENNCCYY

IN A

N E

MER

GEN

CY

176

STARTING WITHAN AUXILIARY BATTERY

If the battery is flat (for battery with op-tical hydrometer: dark in colour with nogreen area in the centre), the engine can bestarted using another battery of the sameor a little higher capacity than the flat one.

This is what you should do fig. 1:

1) Remove the protecting cover on thebattery positive pole by pressing the relatedside wings (front side), then connect thepositive terminals (plus sign + next to theterminal) of the two batteries with a specialcable.

2) Connect a second cable to the negativeterminal (–) of the auxiliary battery withan earth point E on the engine or the gear-box of the car to be started.

IMPORTANT Do not directly connect thenegative terminals of the two batteries: anysparks may set fire to the gas that may bereleased from the battery. If the auxiliarybattery in installed on another car, no met-al part shall accidentally come into contactwith this car and the one with the flat bat-tery.

3) Start the engine.

4) When the engine is running remove thecables in reverse order.

If after a few attempts the engine does notstart, do not insist but contact Alfa Romeo Au-thorized Services.

fig. 1

A0B0181m

Never use a quick batterycharger to start the enginein an emergency as this

could damage the electronic sys-tems of your vehicle, particularlythe control units which manage thestarting and supply functions.

The battery terminal con-necting and disconnectingoperations generate cur-

rent that may cause problems tothe car’s electronic systems. There-fore, this operation should be car-ried out by skilled personnel.

This starting proceduremust be carried out by qual-

ified personnel as incorrect opera-tions may provoke electrical dis-charge of great intensity. The liquidcontained in the battery is toxic andcorrosive. Avoid contact with skinand eyes. Keep naked flame andlighted cigarettes away from thebattery. Do not cause sparks.

WARNING

IN A

N E

MER

GEN

CY

177

STARTING BY INERTIA IN THE EVENT OF A PUNCTURE

IMPORTANT The car is equipped with“Kit for tyre quick repair Fix&Go“, see theinstructions contained in the following chap-ter.

Never push, tow or coaststart the vehicle. This couldcause fuel to flow into the

catalyst damaging it irreversibly.

Signal the presence of thestationary vehicle accord-

ing to the current regulations: haz-ard warning lights, reflecting tri-angle, etc. Any passengers shouldleave the car.

WARNING

Should the type of wheelsused be changed (alloy

rims instead of steel), it is also nec-essary to replace the complete kitof fastening bolts with others ofsuitable size.

WARNINGRemember that the enginebrake and power steering

are not operational until the engineis started, therefore, much greatereffort than usual is needed on thebrake pedal and steering wheel.

WARNING

IN A

N E

MER

GEN

CY

178

FIX&GO KIT FORQUICK TYREREPAIRING

The car is equipped with a tyre quick re-pairing kit called FIX&GO.

The quick repairing kit is placed in the bootinside the appropriate container (A-fig. 10).

– a bottle (C) containing sealer and fit-ted with a filling pipe;

– a “spout“ (D) to be connected to thefilling pipe;

– a sticker bearing the notice “max 80km/h“, to be placed in a position visibleto the driver (on the instrument panel) af-ter fixing the tyre.

The quick repairing kit includes (fig. 11):

– a tool (A) to remove the valve body;

– a compressor (B) with pressure gaugeand fittings;

fig. 10

A0B0390m

fig. 11

A0B0332m

IN A

N E

MER

GEN

CY

179

IMPORTANT In the event of a puncturecaused by foreign bodies, it is possible to fixtyres having cracks with maximum diame-ter up to 4 mm.

In fig. 12 it is possible to identify:

A - tyre area which can be fixed (holesor cracks with diameter of max 4 mm);

B - areas which CANNOT be fixed.

fig. 12

A0B0333m

It is not possible to fixcracks on the tyre sides

and permanent sealing of cracks onthe tread within 25 mm from thetyre side is not guaranteed.

WARNINGDo not use the quick re-pairing kit if the tyre is

damaged due to driving with thewheel flattened. That it is why itis necessary to check accurately thetyre sides.

WARNING

In case of damages to thewheel rim (the deforma-

tion is such that there is an air leak-age) or the tyre outside the limit ar-eas previously indicated, fixing isnot possible. Do not remove foreignbodies (screws or nails) which havepenetrated the tyre.

WARNING

INFLATING PROCEDURE(fig. 13-14-15-16-17-18-19)

– Place the wheel in the position illustratedin the figure (A) for the operation with thevalve, then engage the handbrake.

– Screw the filling pipe (B) to the bottle(C).

– Unscrew the tyre valve plug, remove theelement inside the valve by using the ap-propriate tool (D); be careful not to place iton the sand or on a dirty surface.

– Introduce the filling pipe (B) in the tyrevalve, keep the bottle (C) with the pipe di-rected downwards, then press the bottle sothat the whole sealer can get into the tyre.

fig. 13

A0B0422m

IT IS NECESSARY TO KNOW THAT:

The sealer included in the quick repairingkit, good for temperatures between –30°Cand +80°C, is not adequate for permanentfixing.

The liquid inside the tyre can be easily re-moved with water.

The sealer has no expire date.

IN A

N E

MER

GEN

CY

180

Warning! The bottle (C-fig.11) contains propylene gly-

col. This substance is toxic: do notswallow it and avoid contact withthe eyes, the skin and the clothes.In case of contact, rinse with abun-dant water. If any allergy reactionshould take place call a medical doc-tor. Keep the bottle in the appro-priate compartment away fromheat and children.

WARNING

Do not operate the com-pressor for more than 20

minutes: risk of overheating!

WARNING

IN A

N E

MER

GEN

CY

181

– Screw again the element inside thevalve with the tool (D).

– Use the appropriate lever (E) to insertand clamp the air compressor pipe (F) tothe tyre valve.

– Start the engine, insert the plug (G)in the lighter (or current socket, where fit-ted) and inflate the tyre according to theright pressure value (see “Cold inflation pres-sures“ in the “Technical specifications“ chap-ter). You are advised to check the tyre pres-sure value on the pressure gauge (H) withthe compressor off, in order to have a moreaccurate reading.

fig. 14

A0B0335m

After about 10 minutes, stop and checkthe tyre pressure once again; remember toengage the handbrake.

fig. 15

A0B0423m

fig. 16

A0B0424m

If it is not possible to reach the prescribedpressure, move the car forwards or back-wards for about 10 metres, so that the seal-er is distributed inside the tyre, then repeatinflation.

If, in spite of the last operation, the pre-scribed pressure is not achieved, do notmove the vehicle and contact Alfa RomeoAuthorized Services.

Once the correct tyre pressure has beenreached, start driving immediately so thatthe sealer is distributed evenly inside thetyre.

Place the sticker in a posi-tion where it can be clear-

ly seen by the driver as a noticethat the tyre has been treated withthe quick repairing kit. Drive care-fully especially in a bend. Do notovercome 80 km/h. Avoid suddenacceleration or braking.

WARNING

IN A

N E

MER

GEN

CY

182

Drive carefully to the nearest Alfa RomeoAuthorized Service to check the tyre condi-tions, then have it fixed or replaced.

It is absolutely necessary to communicatethat the tyre has been fixed with the quickrepairing kit.

fig. 18

A0B0426m

fig. 19

A0B0391m

fig. 17

A0B0425m

If the pressure is below1.3 bars, do not drive any

further: the quick repairing kit can-not guarantee proper hold becausethe tyre is too much damaged. Con-tact Alfa Romeo Authorized Ser-vices.Conversely, if at least 1.3 bars aredetected, restore the correct pres-sure (with the engine running andthe handbrake engaged) and startdriving the car with great care.

WARNINGIf, during the pressurerestoring operation, it is

not possible to reach at least 1.8bars, do not drive any further be-cause the tyre is too much dam-aged and the quick repairing kitcannot guarantee proper hold. Con-tact Alfa Romeo Authorized Ser-vices.

WARNING

Tyres fixed with the quickrepairing kit must be used

only temporarily.

WARNING

IN A

N E

MER

GEN

CY

183

WHEN NEEDING TO CHANGE A BULB

Alterations or repairs tothe electric system not car-

ried out correctly and without tak-ing into account the specificationsof the system may cause malfunc-tioning and the risk of fire.

WARNING

Where possible the bulbsshould be replaced by Alfa

Romeo Authorized Services. Thecorrect operation and positioningof the external lights are vital tothe safety of the vehicle and itspassengers and the subject of spe-cific laws.

WARNING

Halogen bulbs containpressurised gas, in the case

of breakage they may burst.

WARNING

Possible replacement of alight on vehicles equipped

with Xenon lamps must be carriedout by Alfa Romeo Authorized Ser-vices.

WARNINGHalogen bulbs must behandled touching only the

metallic part. If the transparentbulb is touched with the fingers itslighting intensity is reduced and thelife of the bulb may be compro-mised. If touched accidentally, rubthe bulb with a cloth moistenedwith methylated spirits and allow

WARNING

IN A

N E

MER

GEN

CY

184

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

– When a light is not working check thecorresponding fuse is intact before replacingthe bulb.

– For the location of fuses, refer to theparagraph “In the event of a burnt fuse“in this chapter.

– Before changing a bulb check the con-tacts for oxidation.

– Burnt bulbs must be replaced with oth-ers of the same type and power.

– Always check the height of the headlightbeam after changing a bulb to ensure theyare safe.

IMPORTANT On the inside surface ofthe headlight there could appear a slightcoat of fogging; this does not show a defect,since it is a natural occurrence due to lowtemperature and to the degree of humidityin the air; it will soon disappear as soon asthe lights are turned on. The presence ofdrops inside the headlight shows water seep-age, refer to an Alfa Romeo Authorized Service.

TYPES OF BULBS (fig. 20)

Various types of bulbs are fitted to your ve-hicle:

A. All glass bulbsThey are pressure-fitted. Pull to re-move.

B. Bayonet type bulbsPress the bulb, turn counter-clockwiseto remove this type of bulb from itsholder.

C. Tubular bulbsFree them from their contacts to re-move.

D. Halogen bulbsTo remove free it from the clip on itsseating.

fig. 20

A0B0233m

IN A

N E

MER

GEN

CY

185

BULBS

High beam

Low beam

Front sidelight

Foglight

Front direction indicator

Side direction indicator

Rear direction indicator

Stop/side light

Additional stop light

Reversing light

Rear fog guard

Number plate light

Front roof light

Boot light

Rear roof light

Courtesy light

Glovebox light

FIGURE 20

D

D

B

D

B

A

B

B

B

A

B

B

A

C

C

C

C

POWER

55W

55W

6W

55W

21W

5W

21W

21W/5W

3.2

21W

21W

5W

10W

10W

5W

5W

5W

TYPE

H1

H7

H6W

H1

PY21W

W5W

P21W

P21/5W

3.2W

P21W

P21W

W5W

C10W

C10W

C5W

C5W

C5W

IN A

N E

MER

GEN

CY

186

IF ONE OF THEEXTERNAL LIGHTSGOES OUT

FRONT LIGHT UNITS

The front light units contain the directionindicators, side lights/dipped and mainbeam light bulbs.

To replace these bulbs the cover must beremoved turning counter-clockwise.

The bulbs are arranged inside the lightunits as follows (fig. 21):

A.Direction indicators

B. Dipped beam headlights

C. Sidelight/main beam headlights

IMPORTANT For the type and power ofthe light refer to what described in the pre-vious chapter “When needing to change abulb“.

When the bulbs havebeen replaced refit the cov-er in the correct position

turning clockwise and ensuring thatit clicks into place.

fig. 22

A0B0392m

fig. 21

A0B0224m

Fig. 22: Dipped beam headlights withXenon lamp

A.Sidelight/main beam headlights

B. Dipped beam headlights/sidelight

Alterations or repairs tothe electric system not car-

ried out correctly and without tak-ing into account the specificationsof the system may cause malfunc-tioning and the risk of fire.

WARNING

IN A

N E

MER

GEN

CY

187

REPLACEMENT OF XENON LIGHTS(optional for versions/marketswhere applicable)

Xenon lights have a very long life, there-fore breakdowns are unlikely.

Hereafter you find the description of thecorrect procedure to replace a Xenon light.

– Rotate the connector (B-fig. 24) of theXenon lamp by a quarter of a turn counter-clockwise, as indicated in (fig. 25) and re-move it.

Dipped-beam headlamps

To replace the bulb proceed as follows:

– Unscrew the three locking screw(B-fig. 23) and remove the protective (A)cover.

fig. 23

A0B0348m

fig. 25

A0B0351m

fig. 24

A0B0349m

If necessary, have the sys-tem checked and repaired

only by Alfa Romeo AuthorizedServices.

WARNING

Any operation regardingthe front light units must

be carried out with the lightsturned off and the ignition key re-moved from the ignition switch:risk of electric discharges.

WARNING

IN A

N E

MER

GEN

CY

188

– Turn ring (A-fig. 26) counterclockwiseand remove it.

– Remove the Xenon lamp (B-fig. 26).

– Fit the new bulb by placing it so that thenotch matches the groove on its housing.

– Refit the protective cover correctly (A-fig. 23).

Main beam headlamps

To replace the bulb proceed as follows:

– Turn the protective cover counter-clock-wise (C-fig. 23) in order to reach the high-beam headlight bulb (A-fig. 24).

– Remove connector (A-fig. 27) and re-move the bulb operating the clips (B) asshown in the figure.

– Fit the new bulb.

– Refit the protective cover correctly (C-fig. 23).

fig. 26

A0B0352m

fig. 27

A0B0350m

IMPORTANT Once the operation hasbeen completed, turn dipped beam head-lamps on and check that the headlight lensmoves when positioning the light itself. Ifnot, re-engage the light aiming motor to thelens as previously described.

The Xenon lamp must behandled touching only themetallic part. If the trans-

parent bulb is touched with the fin-gers, rub it with a clean clothmoistened with methylated spir-its and allow to dry before refit-ting the bulb.

IN A

N E

MER

GEN

CY

189

FRONT DIRECTIONINDICATORS

To replace the bulb (orange colour), pro-ceed as follows:

– Turn the bulb holder counter-clockwise(A-fig. 30) and remove it.

– Remove the bulb (B-fig. 31) from thebulb holder (A-fig. 31), pushing lightly andturning counter-clockwise.

– Replace the bulb (B-fig. 31).

fig. 30

A0B0225m

Direction indicators

To replace the bulb proceed as follows:

– Turn the cover counter-clockwise (A-fig. 29).

– Turn the bulb holder (B) counter-clock-wise.

– Remove the bulb from the bulb holder,pushing lightly and turning counter-clock-wise.

– Replace the bulb and refit the bulb hold-er in its housing.

fig. 29

A0B0353m

fig. 28

A0B0354m

Sidelights

To replace the bulb proceed as follows:

– Turn the protective cover (C-fig. 23)counter-clockwise in order to reach the side-light bulb.

– Remove the bulb (A-fig. 28) from thebulb holder (B), pushing lightly and turningcounter-clockwise.

– Replace the bulb and refit the bulb hold-er (B-fig. 28) in its housing.

– Refit the protective cover correctly (C-fig. 23).

IN A

N E

MER

GEN

CY

190

– Refit the bulb holder (A-fig. 31) bymaking its notches coincide with the groovesin the headlight unit body and turn it clock-wise.

fig. 32

A0B0222m

fig. 31

A0B0221m

DIPPED-BEAM HEADLAMPS(fig. 32)

To replace the bulb proceed as follows:

– Remove the protective cover

– Disconnect the electrical connector (A).

– Release the bulb catch (B).

– Withdraw the bulb and replace it.

– Fit the new bulb making the tabs of themetallic part coincide with the grooves in theheadlamp lens and hook the bulb catch (B).

– Reconnect the electrical connector (A).

– Refit the protective cover correctly.

FRONT FOG LIGHTS

To replace the bulb proceed under the caras follows:

– Loosen the screw (A-fig. 33) and re-move the protection cover (B).

– Release catch (C-fig. 34) and dis-connect connector(D) from the light unit.

– Turn cover (E) counterclockwise and re-move it.

– Withdraw the supply cable terminal (F-fig. 35).

– Release the bulb stopper (G) and re-move the bulb.

fig. 33

A0B0319m

IN A

N E

MER

GEN

CY

191

To adjust the front fog-lights contact Alfa RomeoAuthorized Services.

– Fit a new bulb making the tabs of themetallic part coincide with the grooves in thelamp lens and hook the bulb stopper (G-fig. 35).

– Refit the supply cable terminal (F-fig.35).

– Refit cover (E-fig. 34) and reconnectconnector (D-fig. 34) to the light unit.

fig. 35

A0B0355m

fig. 34

A0B0328m

FRONT SIDELIGHTS

To replace the bulb proceed as follows:

– Remove the protective cover (A-fig.36).

– Remove the bulb holder (B-fig. 36)which is snap-fitted.

– Remove the bulb (C-fig. 37)from thebulb holder, pushing lightly and turningcounter-clockwise.

– Replace the bulb and refit the bulb hold-er (B-fig. 37) in its housing.

– Refit the protective cover correctly (A-fig. 36).

fig. 36

A0B0217m

The efficiency of the lightswill be decreased and may

inconvenience other road users ifthe light units are not correctly ad-justed. If in doubt contact AlfaRomeo Authorized Services tohave them checked and adjusted ifnecessary.

WARNING

IN A

N E

MER

GEN

CY

192

SIDE DIRECTION INDICATORS

To replace the bulb proceed as follows:

– Push the transparent cover towards therear of the car to compress the tab (A-fig. 39). Release the front part and re-move the unit.

– Turn the bulb holder counter-clockwise(B-fig. 40) and remove it from the trans-parent cover (D-fig. 40).

fig. 39

A0B0219m

MAIN-BEAM HEADLAMPS (fig. 38)

To replace the bulb proceed as follows:

– Remove the protective cover.

– Release the clip holding the bulb (A).

– Withdraw the power supply (B) cableconnector.

– Remove and (C) replace the bulb.

– Reconnect the power cable (B) to thebulb.

fig. 37

A0B0218m

– Fit the new bulb making the tabs of themetallic part coincide with the grooves in theheadlamp lens.

– Lock the bulb in place with the clip (A).

– Refit the protective cover correctly.

fig. 38

A0B0223m

IN A

N E

MER

GEN

CY

193

REAR LIGHT UNITS

Rear light units contain the reversing lights,rear fog guards, direction indicators, num-ber plate lights, stop/side lights and the ad-ditional stop light (3rd stop).

REVERSING LIGHTS AND REAR FOG GUARDS

To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:

– Open the boot.

– Slacken the screws (A or B-fig. 41)fastening the boot trim in correspondencewith the light concerned.

fig. 41

A0B0211m

Take care not to damagethe bodywork or the trans-parent cover when remov-

ing the side direction indicator unit.

fig. 40

A0B0220m

– Withdraw the bulb (C-fig. 40) whichis of the pressure-fitted type and replace it.

–Insert the bulb holder (B-fig. 40) inthe transparent cover (D-fig. 40) and po-sition the unit ensuring that the clip clicks in-to place (A-fig. 39).

fig. 42

A0B0212m

– Lower the boot lid trim in the corre-sponding area and remove the bulb holderunit (C-fig. 42) releasing the retainer tab(B-fig. 42).

– Remove and replace the spherical typebulb with bayonet attachment pushing itgently and turning counter-clockwise (fig.43):

(D) reversing light bulb

(E) rear fog guard bulb.

IN A

N E

MER

GEN

CY

194

– Remove and replace the bulb concerned(spherical with bayonet coupling) pushingit gently and turning counter-clockwise (fig.46).

(C) side light/stop light bulb

(D) direction indicator bulb.

– Refit the bulb holder unit fastening it cor-rectly in place with the retainer tabs (B-fig.45).

– Refit the protective cover (B-fig. 44)fastening with nuts (A-fig. 44).

fig. 45

A0B0207m

DIRECTION INDICATORS/SIDELIGHTS AND STOP LIGHTS

To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:

– Open the boot.

– Slacken the two fastening screws (A-fig. 44) and remove the protective cover(B-fig. 44).

– Withdraw the bulb holder unit (A-fig. 45) releasing the retainer tabs (B-fig. 45).

– Refit the bulb holder unit fastening it cor-rectly in place with the retainer tabs (B-fig. 42).

– Refit the boot trim fastening it with thescrews removed previously.

fig. 43

A0B0213m

fig. 44

A0B0214m

IN A

N E

MER

GEN

CY

195

NUMBER PLATE LIGHTS

To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:

– Remove the number plate light unit us-ing a flat screwdriver protected by a softcloth on the stopper (A-fig. 47).

– Remove the unit (B-fig. 47).

– remove the bulb holder (C-fig. 48)turning lightly and replace the bulb (D-fig. 48) which is pressure-fitted.

– Refit the bulb holder (C-fig. 48) turn-ing gently.

– Refit the complete unit (B-fig. 47)firstly inserting the catches and then press-ing in correspondence with the stopper (A-fig. 47).

fig. 46

A0B0208m

fig. 48

A0B0210m

fig. 47

A0B0209m

ADDITIONAL STOP LIGHT(3rd STOP)

To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:

– Open the boot.

– Turn the fastening buttons (A-fig. 49)until they release and lower the trim.

– Slacken the knob (B-fig. 50)and with-draw the complete unit.

– Slacken the screws (C-fig. 51).

– Remove the transparent cover (D-fig. 52) and replace the bulb concerned.

fig. 49

A0B0192m

IN A

N E

MER

GEN

CY

196

When refitting therooflight ensure that theelectrical wiring is correct-

ly arranged and does not interferewith the edges of the light or re-taining clips.

fig. 53

A0B0200m

To refit the rooflight reverse the procedurefollowed for removal.

– Refit the transparent cover and installthe unit locking it with the knob (B-fig. 50).

– Re-position the trim correctly and fastenwith its buttons (A-fig. 49).

IF ONE OF THEINTERNAL LIGHTSGOES OUT

FRONT ROOF LIGHT

To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:

– Remove the roof light (A-fig. 53) lev-ering in the points shown by the arrows.

– Open the cover (B-fig. 54).

– Replace the bulb concerned (C-fig. 54) by pulling it outwards and freeingit from the lateral contacts ensuring that thenew bulb is correctly fitted between the con-tacts.

fig. 51

A0B0205m

fig. 50

A0B0204m

fig. 52

A0B0206m

IN A

N E

MER

GEN

CY

197

REAR ROOFLIGHT BULBS(except versions with sunroof)

To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:

– Remove the rooflight (A-fig. 55) lev-ering in the point shown by the arrow.

– Remove the bulb (B-fig. 56) pullingoutwards and releasing it from the side con-tacts.

– Fit the new bulb making sure that it ispositioned correctly and locked between thecontacts.

– Refit the light firstly inserting the sidewith the connector and then pressing on theother side until the catch clocks into place.

CENTRE REAR ROOF LAMP(only versions with sunroof)

To remove the bulb proceed as follows:

– Remove the rooflight (A-fig. 57) lev-ering in the point shown by the arrow.

– Remove the bulb (B-fig. 58) pullingoutwards and releasing it from the side con-tacts.

– Fit the new bulb making sure that it ispositioned correctly and locked between thecontacts.

– Refit the roof light firstly inserting theside (C-fig. 58) and then pressing on theother side until the catch clicks into place.

fig. 55

A0B0202m

fig. 56

A0B0203m

fig. 54

A0B0201m

fig. 57

A0B0196m

IN A

N E

MER

GEN

CY

198 fig. 62

A0B0194m

– Refit the roof light, inserting it in the cor-rect position firstly on one side and thenpressing on the other until the tab clicks.

GLOVEBOX LIGHT

To remove the bulb proceed as follows:

– Remove the light pushing with a screw-driver on the tab (A-fig. 61).

– Remove the cover (B-fig. 62).

fig. 59

A0B0198m

fig. 61

A0B0195m

fig. 60

A0B0199m

COURTESY LIGHT

To remove the bulb proceed as follows:

– Remove the roof light (A-fig. 59) lev-ering in the point shown by the arrow.

– Remove the bulb (B-fig. 60) pullingit outwards and releasing it from the sidecontacts.

– Fit the new bulb making sure that it ispositioned correctly and locked between thecontacts.

fig. 58

A0B0197m

IN A

N E

MER

GEN

CY

199

– Change the bulb (C-fig. 63) whichis pressure-fitted.

– Refit the cover (B-fig. 62).

– Re-install the light inserting it in the cor-rect position firstly on one side and thenpushing on the other until the tab clicks.

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENTLIGHT

To remove the bulb proceed as follows:

– Open the boot.

– Turn the fastening buttons (A-fig. 64)until they click and lower the trim.

– Withdraw the clear plastic cover andbulb (A-fig. 65) using a flat-bladed screw-driver.

– Replace the bulb (B-fig. 66)of thecylindrical type pulling it outwards ensuringthat the new bulb is correctly positioned be-tween the contacts.

– Refit the transparent cover ensuring thatthe retaining tabs click into place (C-fig. 66).

fig. 63

A0B0193m

fig. 66

A0B0190m

fig. 65

A0B0191m

fig. 64

A0B0192m

IN A

N E

MER

GEN

CY

200

GENERAL

The fuse (fig. 67) is a protective elementof the electrical system: basically it operates(i.e. it gets disconnected) in case of break-down or wrong operation on the system.

When an electrical devices ceases to func-tion, make sure it has not fused. The fila-ment must not be broken: if so, replace theburnt fuse with another of the same value(same colour).

(A) - Intact fuse

(B) - Fuse with broken filament.

Extract the fuse to be replaced using the pin-cers (C)situated on the fuse box.

IN THE EVENT OF A BURNT FUSE

fig. 67

A0B0189m

Never replace a brokenfuse with anything otherthan a new fuse. Use al-

ways an intact fuse of the samecolour.

Never replace a fuse withanother with a higher amp

rating, DANGER OF FIRE!

WARNING

Before replacing a fusecheck that the key has

been removed from the ignitionand that all the services areswitched off and/or disengaged.

WARNING

If a main protective fuse(MAXI-FUSE o MEGA-FUSE)

intervenes, do not fix it but contactan Alfa Romeo Authorized Service.

WARNING

If a fuse blows again con-tact Alfa Romeo Autho-

rized Services.

WARNING

IN A

N E

MER

GEN

CY

201

The general protection fuses of Alfa156 GTA are in the engine compart-ment, inside a container near the batterypositive terminal; to gain access to the fus-es lift the two lids (fig. 68 and fig. 69).

FUSE AND RELAYS IN THEMAIN FUSEBOX (fig. 70)

The fuses for the main devices are housedin a control unit under the dashboard, to theleft of the steering column.

To gain access to them , remove the pan-el (A) releasing the tabs (B) in the direc-tion of the arrow below and unlock thescrew (C).

A. Dipped beam light relay

B. Relay for sunroof , seat heater, rear win-dow power control, seat electric adjustment.

The symbols that identify the main electriccomponent protected by each fuse, areshown on the label (fig. 71) on the in-ner side of the panel (A-fig. 70).

Some spare fuses are housed at the rightof the control unit (D-fig. 70); you are ad-vised to replenish the stock of spare fuseswhen they are used.

fig. 69

A0B0189m

fig. 68

A0B0188m

fig. 70

A0B0172m

fig. 71

A0B0185m

IN A

N E

MER

GEN

CY

202

FUSES ABOVE THE MAIN FUSEBOX (fig. 72)

The protection fuses of certain devices aregrouped together on three containers locatedabove the main fusebox to which access isgained removing the panel (A-fig. 70).

FUSES AND RELAYSACCESSIBLEFROM THE GLOVEBOX

Some fuses and relays for services suppliedon request or only for certain specific mar-ket versions are located on a bracket behindthe glovebox.

To gain access to the fuses remove(A-fig. 73) the pressure-fitted lid.

Access to the relays is gained by removingthe glovebox: contact Alfa Romeo Autho-rized Services.

A. Fog light relay.

B. Headlamp washer timer.

fig. 72

A0B0141m

fig. 73

A0B0184m

IN A

N E

MER

GEN

CY

203

FUSES AND RELAYSIN ENGINE BAY

In the engine compartment, housed on abracket in front of the battery and protect-ed by a special cover, there is a variablenumber of fuses and relays depending onthe versions.

IMPORTANT The arrangement of thefuses and relays may vary depending on theversions and markets. In the event of a sus-pected anomaly, contact Alfa Romeo Au-thorized Services.

Remove the cover (A-fig. 74) to gainaccess to the following relays (fig. 75):

A. Engine radiator cooling fan 2nd speedrelay.

B. Engine radiator cooling fan 1st speed re-lay.

C. Fuel pump relay

D. Electronic injection relay

E. Climate control compressor relay

F. Engine radiator fan 2nd speed relay.

fig. 74

A0B0154m

fig. 75

A0B0430m

IN A

N E

MER

GEN

CY

204

Left front side light

Right front side light

Left rear side light

Right rear side light

Left dipped-beam headlamp/Xenon lamps (optional)

Right dipped-beam headlamp/Xenon lamps (optional)

Left main-beam headlamp

Right main-beam headlamp

Cruise Control (optional)

Left number plate light

Right number plate light

Reversing lights/Sound system

Left rear fog guard

Right rear fog guard

Direction indicators - Hazard warning lights

Fog lamps

Car interior and glovebox lights

HI-FI BOSE system

10A

10A

10A

10A

20A

20A

10A

10A

10A

10A

10A

10A

10A

10A

10A

15A

10A

25A

LIGHTS FUSE AMPERAGE FIGURE

FUSE SUMMARY TABLE

7

6

6

7

8

4

2

1

13

7

6

13

7

6

14

16

12-13

9

70

70

70

70

70

70

70

70

70

70

70

70

70

70

70

72

70

72

IN A

N E

MER

GEN

CY

205

10

11

13

5

4

5

3

7

15

13

15

9

1

4

12

2

15

SERVICES FUSE AMPERAGE FIGURE

Windscreen wiper, windscreen washer/Rearscreen wiper/Rain sensor (optional)

Horns

GSM Box for Connect/Navigator-electronic warning system

Front power windows

Left rear power window

Right rear power window

Door locking system - Boot light

Boot electric opening

Rearscreen heating

Wing mirror adjustment

Wing mirror defrosting

Cigar lighter/Odour sensor

Headlamp washer

Headlamp aiming device

Instrument cluster

Main-beam headlamp warning light

Rearscreen heating warning light

20A

20A

10A

30A

20A

20A

20A

30A

30A

10A

30A

15A

20A

10A

10A

10A

30

70

70

70

70

72

72

70

72

70

70

70

70

73

70

70

70

70

IN A

N E

MER

GEN

CY

206

Sound system/Diagnosis socket

Electronic alarm system

Supplementary electrical socket in the boot (Sportwagon versions)

Remote control

Controls lighting/Stop lights

Rear control lighting from sidelights

Seat heating/Sunroof/Seat electrical adjustment

Air bag system

ABS system

Alfa Romeo CODE system

Climate control system

Engine cooling radiator fan:First speedSecond speed

Passenger compartment fan

Electronic ignition and injection system

70

70

72

70

72

72

72

72

6972

72

70

69

69

69

72727269

10A

10A

20A

10A

10A

10A

30A

10A (*)

60A10A (*)

7.5A

15A

40A

40A

40A

7.5A15A15A30A

12

12

10

13

3

6

8

2 (*)

911 (*)

13

9

67

4

1314155

SERVICES FUSE AMPERAGE FIGURE

IN A

N E

MER

GEN

CY

207

72

72

69

6969

6969

1

12

2

13

78

SERVICES FUSE AMPERAGE FIGURE

Services switched off with starting

Battery power supply for Alfa Romeo CODE/Injection system

All devices operating with the key at MAR are not working

Almost all the electric systems and components are not working

Selespeed gearbox

(*) Specific components and values depending on the version/market. If in doubt, especially for the replacement of fuses which protect safety circuitsand/or systems (Air bag, ABS, etc.), you are recommended to contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services, also to locate the cause of the fuse tripping.

7.5A

7.5A

30A

80A70A

30A20A

IN A

N E

MER

GEN

CY

208

IN THE EVENT OF A FLAT BATTERY

First of all, you are advised to refer to the“Car maintenance“ chapter for precautionsto be adopted in order to prevent the bat-tery from getting flat and to ensure its longdurability.

CHARGING THE BATTERY

IMPORTANT The description of the bat-tery charging procedure is described only forinformative purposes. This operation shouldbe carried out by Alfa Romeo Authorized Ser-vices.

Charging should be slow at a low amp rat-ing for about 24 hours. Charging for a longertime may damage the battery.

Charge the battery as follows:

– Disconnect the terminal from the bat-tery negative (–) pole.

– Connect the charger cables to the bat-tery, respecting polarity.

– Turn on the charger.

– After charging turn off the charger be-fore disconnecting it from the battery.

– Reconnect the terminal to the batterynegative (–) pole.

STARTING WITHAN AUXILIARY BATTERY

See “Starting with an auxiliary battery“ inthis chapter.

The fluid contained in thebattery is poisonous and

corrosive. Avoid contact with theskin or eyes. The battery should becharged in a well ventilated placeand kept away from naked flamesor sources of sparks: danger of ex-plosion and fire.

WARNING

Never attempt to charge afrozen battery before

thawing it, the danger of explosionexists. If it has frozen, alwayscheck that the inside elements arenot broken (risk of short circuit)and that the body is not cracked,with the risk of acid coming outwhich is poisonous and corrosive.

WARNING

IN A

N E

MER

GEN

CY

209

IF THE VEHICLE IS TO BE TOWED

The tow ring supplied with the vehicle ishoused in the tool box under the boot mat.

To install the tow ring, proceed as follows:

– Take the tow ring from the tool box.

– Remove the cover (A) snap-fitted onthe front (fig. 77) or rear bumper (fig.78). If the supplied flat screwdriver is usedto carry out this operation, protect the tipwith a soft cloth to prevent damaging thecar.

– Firmly screw the ring in its housing.

fig. 77

A0B0331m

fig. 78

A0B0330m

Carefully clean the thread-ed housing before tighten-

ing the ring. Before beginning totow the car make sure that thetow ring is firmly tightened in itsthreaded housing.

WARNING

IN A

N E

MER

GEN

CY

210

TOWING THE SELESPEED GEARBOX VERSIONS

IMPORTANT For version with Selespeedgearbox, make sure that it is in neutral (N)(checking that the car moves when pushed)and proceed as for towing a normal car withmechanical gearbox following the instructionsgiven on the previous page.

If setting to neutral is not possible, do nottow the vehicle. Contact Alfa Romeo Au-thorized Services.

Before beginning to towthe car, turn the ignition

key to MAR and then to STOP, donot remove it. Removing the keyautomatically engages the steeringlock resulting in the impossibilityto steer the wheels. When towingremember that without the help ofthe servo-brake and power steer-ing, it is necessary to exert moreeffort on the brake pedal and forsteering. Do not use flexible cablesfor towing and avoid jerks. Dur-ing towing operations make surethat fastening the joint to the cardoes not damage the componentsin contact with it. When towing thecar it is compulsory to comply withthe specific traffic regulations con-cerning both the towing device andbehaviour on the road.

WARNINGDo not start the enginewhen towing the vehicle.

WARNING

IN A

N E

MER

GEN

CY

211

IF THE VEHICLE IS TO BE LIFTED

USING AN ARM LIFT OR WORKSHOP LIFT

The vehicle must only be lifted laterally positioning the ends of the arms or the workshoplift in the areas illustrated, approx. 40 cm from the profile of the wheelhouse(fig. 79).

fig. 79

A0B0394m

The car is to be lifted po-sitioning the jack or the

workshop lift arm plate only in thepoints shown (fig. 79).

WARNING

IN A

N E

MER

GEN

CY

212

IF AN ACCIDENT OCCURS

– It is important to keep calm.

– If you are not directly involved in the ac-cident, stop at least ten metres away fromthe accident.

– If you are on a motorway do not ob-struct the emergency lane with your car.

– Turn off the engine and turn on the haz-ard lights.

– At night, illuminate the scene of the ac-cident with your headlights.

– Act carefully, you must not risk being runover.

– Mark the accident by putting the red tri-angle at the regulatory distance from the carwhere it can be clearly seen.

– Call the emergency services making theinformation you give as accurate as you can.On the motorway use the special column-mounted emergency phones.

– In pile-ups on the motorway, particular-ly when the visibility is bad, there is a highrisk of other vehicles running into those al-ready immobile. Get out of the vehicle im-mediately and take refuge behind the guardrail.

– If the doors are blocked, do not try toget out of the vehicle by breaking the strat-ified windscreen. The rear and side windowsare easier to break.

– Remove the ignition keys of the vehi-cles involved.

– If you smell petrol or other chemicals,do not smoke and make sure all cigarettesare extinguished.

– Use a fire extinguisher, blanket, sand orearth to put out fires, no matter how smallthey are. Never use water.

– If it is not necessary to use the lightingsystem, disconnect the terminal from thebattery negative (–) pole.

IN A

N E

MER

GEN

CY

213

IF ANYONE IS INJURED

– Never leave the injured person alone.The obligation to provide assistance existseven for those not directly involved in theaccident.

– Do not congregate around the injuredperson.

– Reassure the injured person that helpis on its way and will arrive soon. Stay closeby to calm him/her down in case of panic.

– Unfasten or cut seat belts holding injuredparties.

– Do not give an injured person anythingto drink.

– Never move an injured person except inthe following cases.

– Pull the injured person from the car on-ly if it risks catching fire, it is sinking in wa-ter or is likely to fall over a cliff or similar.Do not pull his/her arms or legs, do notbend the head and, as far as possible, keepthe body horizontal.

FIRST-AID KIT

It is advisable to have also a fire extin-guisher and a blanket besides the first-aidkit.

CAR M

AIN

TEN

AN

CE

214

It is however wise to remember that Pro-grammed Maintenance does not complete-ly cover all the car’s requirements: also inthe initial period before 20,000 km servicecoupon and later, between one coupon andanother, ordinary care is still necessary suchas for example routinely checking and top-ping up the level of fluids, checking the tyrepressure, etc...

IMPORTANT The Programmed Mainte-nance coupons are specified by the Manu-facturer. The failure to have them carried outmay invalidate the warranty.

The Programmed Maintenance service iscarried out by all Alfa Romeo Authorized Ser-vices, at pre-established times.

If during each operation, in addition to theones programmed, the need arises for fur-ther replacements or repairs, these may becarried out only with the explicit agreementof the customer.

IMPORTANT You are advised to contactAlfa Romeo Authorized Services in the eventof any minor operating faults, without wait-ing for the next service coupon.

PROGRAMMEDMAINTENANCE

Correct maintenance is essential for en-suring long car life under the best conditions.

This is why Alfa Romeo has programmeda series of checks and maintenance opera-tions every 20,000 km.

IMPORTANT At 2000 km from themaintenance deadline, the Infocenter dis-play will show “SCHEDULED SERVICE WITH-IN“ which is shown again turning the igni-tion key to MAR, every 200 km. Forfurther details, see “Service“ in “InfocenterDisplay“ paragraph in chapter “Getting toknow your car“.

CCAARR MMAAIINNTTEENNAANNCCEE

CAR M

AIN

TEN

AN

CE

215

Check tyre conditions/wear and adjust pressure if necessary

Check operation of lighting system (headlights, direction indicators, hazard lights,boot lights, passenger compartment lights, glovebox light, warning lights, etc..)

Check operation of windscreen wiper/washer system, adjust spray jets

Check position/wear of windscreen/rearscreen wiper blades

Check front disk brake pad wear indicator

Check conditions of rear disk brake pads

Sight check for the conditions of: exterior bodywork, underbody protection, pipes and hoses (exhaust - fuel - brakes), rubber parts (boots, sleeves, bushes, etc.)

Check for bonnet and boot lock cleanness, lever cleanness and lubrication

Check condition of timing drive belt

Sight check for conditions of Poly-V accessory drive belt

Check/adjust handbrake lever stroke

Check exhaust emissions

Check operation of antievaporation system

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE PROGRAMME

20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180Thousands of km

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ●

● ●

● ● ● ●

● ● ● ●

● ●

CAR M

AIN

TEN

AN

CE

216

20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180Thousands of km

Air cleaner cartridge replacement

Check and if necessary top up fluid levels (brakes, hydraulic clutch, power steering, windscreen wiper, battery, engine coolant, etc..)

Check and if necessary top up Selespeed oil level

Replacement of timing drive belt (*) and Poly-V accessory drive belt

Replacement of spark plugs

Check operation of engine control systems (through diagnosis)

Check gearbox and differential oil level

Change engine oil and oil filter

Change brake fluid (or every 2 year)

Replacement of dust/pollen filter

(*) Or every 3 years in harsh conditions (cold climates, stop and go city traffic, dusty areas)Or every 5 years, regardless of the mileage.

● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

●

●

● ● ● ●

● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

CAR M

AIN

TEN

AN

CE

217

ADDITIONALOPERATIONS

Every 1000 km or before long journeyscheck and if necessary top up:

– engine coolant level

– brake fluid/hydraulic clutch control flu-id level

– power steering fluid level

– windscreen washer and headlamp wash-er fluid level

– tyre pressure and conditions.

Every 3000 km check the level of theengine oil and top up if necessary.

You are recommended to use products ofthe FL Selenia, designed and developedexpressly for Alfa Romeo cars (see “Refill-ing“ table in “Technical specifications“ chap-ter).

ANNUAL INSPECTIONPLAN

An annual inspection plan has beenestablished for cars thet cover lessthan 20,000 km (e.g. 10,000 km).It consists of the following:

– Check tyre conditions/wear and adjustpressure if required.

– Check lighting system operation (head-lights, direction indicators, hazard lights,boot lights, passenger compartment lights,glovebox light, warning lights of instrumentpanel, etc.)

– Check windscreen and rear-screenwiper/washer operation, adjust nozzles

– Check windscreen/rear-screen blade po-sition/wear

– Check condition and wear of the frontbrake pad

– Check for bonnet and boot lock clean-ness, lever cleanness and lubrication

– Visually check the following: engine,gearbox, transmission, piping (exhaust - fu-el - brakes) rubber components (casings -sleeves - bushings, etc..), brake and fuelhoses

– Check battery charge condition

– Visually check the condition of the beltsand various controls

– Check and top up if necessary, the flu-id levels (coolant, brake fluid, windscreenwasher fluid, battery, etc.)

– Change engine oil

– Replace engine oil filter

– Change combined pollen filter.

CAR M

AIN

TEN

AN

CE

218

IMPORTANT Engine oil

Should prevailing use of the car be underone of the following specially heavy condi-tions:

– dusty roads

– short distances (less than 7-8 km) re-peated and with external temperatures be-low zero

– frequently idling engines or long distancelow speed driving or in case of a long terminactivity

replace engine oil more frequently than re-quired on Service Schedule.

IMPORTANT Air cleaner

Using the car on dusty roads, change theair cleaner more frequently than stated inthe Scheduled Maintenance Programme. Forany doubts about the intervals between en-gine oil and air cleaner changes in relationto how the car is used, contact Alfa RomeoAuthorized Services.

IMPORTANT Battery

You are recommended to have the batterycharge conditions checked, preferably at theonset of winter, to avoid the possibility offreezing the electrolyte.

This check should be carried out more fre-quently if the car is used prevailingly forshort journeys, or if it is fitted with servicesthat absorb high amounts of current per-manently with the ignition key off, especiallyif installed in the after market.

In the case of use of the car in hot climatesor particularly harsh conditions, it is wiseto check the level of the battery fluid (elec-trolyte) at more frequent intervals than stat-ed in the Scheduled Maintenance Pro-gramme.

Car maintenance shouldbe entrusted to AlfaRomeo Authorized Ser-

vices. For routine and minor main-tenance operations you wish tocarry out yourself, always makesure you have the proper equip-ment, genuine Alfa Romeo spareparts and the necessary fluids; donot however carry out these oper-ations if you have no experience.

IMPORTANT Pollen filter

If the car is used frequently in dusty orheavily polluted environments it is advisableto replace the filtering element more fre-quently; in particular it should be replaced ifa reduction of the amount of air admitted tothe passenger compartment is noted.

CAR M

AIN

TEN

AN

CE

219

fig. 1

1 Engine oil - 2 Battery - 3 Brake fluid - 4 Windscreen washer fluid - 5 Engine coolant fluid - 6 Power steering fluid

CHECKING FLUIDLEVELS

When topping up takecare not to confuse the var-ious types of fluids: they

are all incompatible with one an-other and could seriously damagethe car.

A0B0292m

Never smoke while workingin the engine compartment;

gas and inflammable vapours maybe present, with the risk of fire.

WARNING

CAR M

AIN

TEN

AN

CE

220

Used engine oil and filtercontain pollutants. ContactAlfa Romeo Authorized

Services to have the oil and filterchanged as these are equipped todispose of the waste oil and filtersrespecting the environment andlaws.

ENGINE OIL (fig. 2)

The engine oil level should be checkedwhen the car is standing on a level surfacea few minutes (about 5) after the enginehas been switched off.

Remove the dipstick (A), clean it, put itback completely, remove it once again andcheck that the level is between the MINand MAX marks on the dipstick.

The interval between the MIN and MAXmarks corresponds to approximately 1 literof oil.

Engine oil consumption

Max. engine oil consumption is usually 400 grams every 1000 km.

During the initial period of use the enginesettles, therefore the engine oil consump-tion can only be considered stabilised afterthe first 5000 ÷ 6000 km.

IMPORTANT Engine oil consumption de-pends on the way of driving and the condi-tions of use of the car.

If the oil level is near or even below theMIN, mark, add oil trough the filler neck(B), until reaching the MAX mark.

IMPORTANT If a routine check revealsthat the oil level is above the MAX mark,contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services tohave the correct level restored.

IMPORTANT After adding or changingthe oil, run the engine for a few seconds andwait a few minutes after stopping it.

Never add oil with char-acteristics (classification,viscosity) which are differ-

ent from those of the oil already inthe circuit.

fig. 2

A0B0164m

Scarves, ties and other loo-se clothing might be pulled

by moving parts.

WARNING

When the engine is hot,take care when working

inside the engine compartment toavoid burns. Remember that whenthe engine is hot, the fan may cutin: danger of injury.

WARNING

CAR M

AIN

TEN

AN

CE

221

– if the level is below the MAX mark,top up with oil until reaching the correct lev-el;

– after screwing the cap back on, insertthe breather tube completely on the capspout and turn the ignition key to STOP.

SELESPEED GEARBOXHYDRAULIC SYSTEM OIL(fig. 3)

The oil level of the Selespeed systemshould be carried out with the car on a lev-el surface and with the engine stopped andcold.

To check the level, proceed as follows:

– turn the ignition key to MAR;

– disconnect the breather tube and re-move the cap (A) checking that the levelcorresponds with the MAX mark on the dip-stick of the actual cap;

Do not add oil with dif-ferent characteristics thanthose of the oil already in

the system.

Used gearbox oil containpollutants. Contact AlfaRomeo Authorized Services

to have the oil changed as these areequipped to dispose of the wasteoil respecting the environment andlaws.

fig. 3

A0B0162m

When the engine is hot,take care when working

inside the engine compartment toavoid burns. Remember that whenthe engine is hot, the fan may cutin: danger of injury.

WARNING

Do not remove he capwhen the engine is hot:

danger of burns.

WARNING

Top up only with the samefluid contained in the cool-ing circuit. PARAFLU UP

(red) cannot be mixed withPARAFLU 11 (blue) or with otherfluids. Should this take place, donot start the engine and contact Al-fa Romeo Authorized Service.

CAR M

AIN

TEN

AN

CE

222 fig. 5

A0B0158m

ENGINE COOLANTLEVEL (fig. 4)

POWER STEERING OIL LEVEL(fig. 5)

Check that the oil level in the reservoir isat the MAX level.

This operation must be carried out with thecar on level ground and when the engineis stationary and cold.

Check that the level reaches the MAX ref-erence notch on the reservoir or coincideswith the upper notch (maximum level) onthe dipstick integral with the reservoir cap.

If the level of the oil in the reservoir fallsbelow the specified level, top up only withone of the products listed in the table “Flu-ids and lubricants“ in “Technical specifica-tions“ chapter as follows:

The antifreeze mixture contained in thecooling circuit guarantees protection downto –35°C.

The cooling system ispressurised. If necessary,replace the cap only with

another original one, otherwise theefficiency of the system could becompromised.

The level of the coolant in the header tank(reservoir) should be checked with the en-gine cold and the car on a level surface andit should be between the MIN and MAXmarks on the tank. If the level is low, loosenthe header tank cap (A) and slowly poura mixture of the fluid specified in the ”Flu-ids and lubricants ” table in section “Tech-nical Specifications”, through the filler neckuntil nearing the MAX mark; have this op-eration carried out at Alfa Romeo AuthorisedServices.

fig. 4

A0B0161m

Power steering fluid is hi-ghly inflammable. Do not

let it come into contact with hot en-gine parts.

WARNING

CAR M

AIN

TEN

AN

CE

223

IMPORTANT Contact Alfa Romeo Au-thorized Services for maintenance and re-pair operations.

– Start the engine and allow the oil in thereservoir to settle.

– When the engine is running turn thesteering wheel lock to lock a few minutes.

– Top up to the MAX level notch andthen replace the cover.

Oil consumption is verylow, if topping up again isneeded shortly afterwards,

have the system checked for pos-sible leaks by Alfa Romeo Autho-rized Services.

BRAKE AND HYDRAULIC CLUTCH FLUID (fig. 6)

From time to time check the instrumentpanel warning light x by pressing cover(B) of the reservoir (A) (with the ignitionkey at MAR) instrument panel warninglight should come on.

fig. 6

A0B0157m

When loosening the reser-voir cap do not allow thefluid to come into contact

with painted parts. If it does, washit off immediately with water.

Brake and clutch fluid ispoisonous and highly cor-

rosive. In the event of accidentalcontact, wash the parts involvedimmediately with neutral soap andwater, then rinse thoroughly. Seea doctor at once if the fluid is swal-lowed.

WARNING

Symbol π on the containerindicates synthetic type

brake fluid distinguishing it fromthe mineral kind. Using mineral type fluids damages the sp ecial rubber braking system gasketsbeyond s

WARNING

CAR M

AIN

TEN

AN

CE

224

WINDSCREEN/HEADLIGHTWASHER FLUID (fig. 7)

Check the level in the reservoir removingthe cap (A).

If necessary top up using a mixture of wa-ter and TUTELA PROFESSIONAL SC35 as follows:

– 30% of TUTELA PROFESSIONALSC 35 and 70% water in summer;

– 50% of TUTELA PROFESSIONALSC 35 and 50% water in winter;

– in the case of temperatures below -20°Cuse TUTELA PROFESSIONAL SC 35fluid neat.

fig. 7

A0A0156m

IMPORTANT Brake and hydraulic clutchfluid is hygroscopic (i.e. it absorbs moisture).For this reason, if the car is mainly used inareas with a high degree of atmospheric hu-midity, the fluid should be replaced at morefrequent intervals than specified in theScheduled Maintenance Programme.

To avoid damaging thepump motors, do not usethe windscreen washers

when the reservoir is empty.

Do not travel with thewindscreen washer reser-

voir empty: the action of the wind-screen washer is fundamental forimproving vision.

WARNING

Some commercial additivesfor windscreen washers

are inflammable. The engine com-partment contains hot componentswhich could set it on fire.

WARNING

CAR M

AIN

TEN

AN

CE

225

AIR FILTER

The air cleaner is connected to the tem-perature and air flow sensors which send theelectrical signals needed for correct opera-tion of the injection and ignition system tothe control unit.

It must therefore always be in perfect con-ditions to ensure correct operation of the en-gine, low consumption and exhaust emis-sion levels.

The description for chang-ing the cleaner is describedfor informative purposes

only. This operation should be car-ried out by Alfa Romeo AuthorizedServices.If they are not carried out cor-

rectly and with the due precau-tions, the operations involvingcleaner replacement describedherein may compromise the safetyof the car.

To change the cleaner, proceed as follows:

– remove the cover (A-fig. 8);

– slacken the two screws shown by thearrows and move the bracket (B-fig. 9)to one side complete with relay;

– remove the sleeve as follows:

– slacken the clamps (A-fig. 10), dis-connect the air flow meter electrical con-nection (C) and remove the sleeve (B).

fig. 9

A0B0431m

fig. 8

A0B0154m

fig. 10

A0B0151m

CAR M

AIN

TEN

AN

CE

226

BATTERY

The battery is of the “Limited Mainte-nance“ type and is fitted with an optical in-dicator (A-fig. 11) for checking the elec-trolyte level and charge.

Under normal conditions of use the elec-trolyte does not need topping up with distilledwater. To make sure that it is in efficient con-ditions, at routine intervals check the indica-tor on the battery cover which should be darkin colour with a green central area.

If the indicator is a bright light colour, ordark without the green central area, contactAlfa Romeo Authorized Services.

POLLEN FILTER

This has mechanical/electrostatic air fil-tering actions, provided that the windowsand doors are shut.

Have the pollen filter checked once a yearby Alfa Romeo Authorized Services, prefer-ably at the onset of summer.

If the car is mainly used in dusty or heav-ily polluted areas, the filter should bechanged at more frequent intervals thanspecified in the Scheduled Maintenance Pro-gramme.

IMPORTANT The failure to replace thefilter can considerably reduce the effective-ness of the climate control system.

fig. 11

A0B0147m

When the car is habitual-ly driven in dusty areas,the cleaner should be

changed at shorter intervals thanthose given in the ProgrammedMaintenance Schedule.

Any attempt to clean theair cleaner may cause seri-ous engine damage.

CAR M

AIN

TEN

AN

CE

227

Batteries contain sub-stances that are veryharmful for the environ-

ment. You are advised to have thebattery changed at Alfa Romeo Au-thorized Services, which are prop-erly equipped for disposing of usedbatteries respecting nature and thelaw.

Incorrect fitting of electri-cal accessories can serious-ly damage the car. If after

buying the car, you wish to installelectric accessories (alarm, soundsystem, radiotelephone, etc.) con-tact Alfa Romeo Authorized Ser-vices who will be able to suggestthe most suitable devices andabove all advise about the need touse a more powerful battery.

If the car is to remain sta-tionary for a long time invery cold weather, remove

the battery and take it to a warmplace, otherwise it might freeze.

The liquid in the battery ispoisonous and corrosive.

Avoid contact with eyes and skin.Do not bring naked flames or pos-sible sources of sparks near to thebattery: risk of fire and explosion.

WARNING

When doing any work onthe battery or near it,

always wear special protectivegoggles.

WARNING

Working with a low fluidlevel may damage the bat-

tery irreversibly, even causing it toburst.

WARNING

CAR M

AIN

TEN

AN

CE

228

– Connect the charger cables to the bat-tery terminals ensuring that the bias is cor-rect.

– Turn on the charger.

– After charging turn off the charger be-fore disconnecting it from the battery.

– Reconnect the battery negative termi-nal (–).

IMPORTANT Turn off the alarm with theremote control and deactivate the systemturning the emergency key to “OFF“ (see“Electronic alarm“ in the chapter “Gettingto know your car“).

Brightwhite colour

Dark colour without green central area

Dark colour with green central area

Top up electrolyte

Low battery charge

Electrolyte level and charge sufficient

Contact Alfa RomeoAuthorized Services

Charge the battery (advisable to contact Alfa Romeo

Authorized Services)

No action needed

CHARGING THE BATTERY

IMPORTANT The description of the bat-tery charging procedure is described only forinformative purposes. This operation shouldbe carried out by Alfa Romeo Authorized Ser-vices.

Charging should be slow at a low amp rat-ing for about 24 hours. Charging for a longertime may damage the battery.

Charge the battery as follows:

– Disconnect the terminal from the bat-tery negative (–) pole.

IMPORTANT When reconnecting thenegative battery cable after having discon-nected it, wait for 2 minutes before turn-ing the key to enable the climate control sys-tem to reset actuator strokes properly.

CHECKING THE CHARGE

The battery charge may be checked satis-factorily using the indicator, and acting ac-cording to the colour the indicator shows.

Refer to the table below or to the label(fig. 12) on the battery.

fig. 12

A0B0146m

CAR M

AIN

TEN

AN

CE

229

IMPORTANT A battery kept at below50% of its capacity is damaged by sulpha-tion, the capacity is reduced and starting isdifficult, there is also more possibility offreezing (this can occur at –10 °C). In theevent of a prolonged stop, refer to “Vehi-cle inactivity“ in the chapter “Correct use ofthe car“.

– When leaving the car parked in agarage, make sure that the doors, bonnet,boot and interior lids are properly shut toprevent internal lights from staying on.

– Before doing any work on the electricsystem, disconnect the battery negative ter-minal.

– If after purchasing the car, you wish toinstall electrical accessories which need apermanent electrical supply (alarm, hands-free phone, radio-navigator etc.) contact Al-fa Romeo Authorized Services whose qual-ified personnel, in addition to suggesting themost suitable devices from Lineaccessori Al-fa Romeo will be able to evaluate the totalelectrical absorption, checking whether thecar’s electric system is able to support theload required or whether a battery with high-er capacity is necessary. In fact, these de-vices continue to absorb current with theignition key off (car parked, engine off) andmay gradually drain the battery.

REPLACING THE BATTERY

If required, replace the battery with a gen-uine spare part having the same specifica-tions. If a battery with different specifica-tions is fitted, the service intervals given inthe Scheduled Maintenance Programme inthis section will no longer be valid. Referto the instructions provided by the batterymanufacturer.

USEFUL HINTS TO EXTEND THE LIE OF YOUR BATTERY

To avoid quickly draining the battery andto preserve its operating conditions over thecourse of time, carefully follow the instruc-tions below:

– The terminals must always be tightened.

– As far as possible, avoid keeping ser-vices on for a long time with the enginestopped (radio, hazard lights, parking lights,etc.).

Never attempt to charge afrozen battery before

thawing it, the danger of explosionexists. If it has frozen, alwayscheck that the inside elements arenot broken and that the body is notcracked, with the risk of acid co-ming out which is poisonous andcorrosive.

WARNING

CAR M

AIN

TEN

AN

CE

230

– Do not check for current in the cables byshort-circuiting the ends.

– If electrical welding is to be carried outon the body of the car, the electronic con-trol units must be disconnected or removedif the work involves the production of hightemperatures.

You are also reminded that services withhigh current absorption activated by the user,such as bottle warmers, vacuum cleaners,cellular telephone, mini refrigerator, etc. ac-celerate the battery drainage process if theyare powered with the engine not run-ning or running at idle speed.

IMPORTANT It should also be notedthat improper branches on connectors of theelectric wiring for installing additional equip-ment is dangerous, particularly if safety de-vices are involved.

ELECTRONICCONTROL UNITS

With normal use of the car, no particularprecautions need to be taken.

In the event of work on the electric systemor emergency starting, the instructions giv-en below must absolutely be adhered to:

– Always switch off the engine before dis-connecting the battery from the electric sys-tem.

– If it is necessary to charge the battery,always disconnect it from the electric sys-tem.

– When starting in an emergency, onlyuse an auxiliary battery and not a batterycharger.

– Check that the bias is correct and thatthe connections between the battery andthe electric system are in efficient conditions.

– Do not connect or disconnect the ter-minals of the electronic units while the ig-nition key is at MAR.

Battery

60 Ah

70 Ah

Maximum permissible loadless absorption

36 mA

42 mA

The total absorption of these accessories(standard and installed later) must be lessthan 0.6 mA x Ah (of the battery), as shownin the table below:

Alterations or repairs tothe electric system carried

out incorrectly and without takinginto account the specifications ofthe system, may cause operatingfaults with the risk of fire.

WARNING

CAR M

AIN

TEN

AN

CE

231

WHEELS AND TYRES

Check the pressure of each tyre, every twoweeks and before a long journey.

The pressure should be checked with thetyre rested and cold.

It is normal for the pressure to increasewhen the car is in use. If you have to checkor restore the pressure when the tyres arehot, bear in mind that the pressure shouldbe +0.3 bar compare with the specified rat-ing.

For the correct tyre inflation pressure, see“Wheels“ in “Technical specifications“ chap-ter.

Incorrect pressure causes abnormal tyrewear fig. 13:

A - Normal pressure: tread evenly worn.

B - Low pressure: tread particularly wornat the edges.

C - High pressure: tread particularly wornin the centre.

Tyres should be changed when the treadthickness is reduced to 1.6 mm. In any casefollow local regulations.

fig. 13

A0B0235m

WARNINGS

Where possible, avoid sudden braking, tyresquealing starts, etc.

Particularly avoid violent bumps againstkerbs, potholes or obstacles of various kinds.Prolonged driving on rough roads may dam-age the tyres.

Routinely check the tyres for cuts on thesides, swellings or uneven tread wear. If nec-essary contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Ser-vices.

Avoid overloading the vehicle when trav-elling: this may cause serious damage to thewheels and tyres.

Remember that car roadholding also depends on

correct tyre inflation pressure.

WARNING

Excessively low pressurecauses overheating of the

tyre with the possibility of seriousdamage to it.

WARNING

CAR M

AIN

TEN

AN

CE

232 fig. 14

A0B0236m

If a tyre is punctured, stop immediatelyand change it to avoid damage to the tyre,the rim, suspensions and steering system.Tyres age even if they are not used much.Cracks in the tread rubber are a sign of ag-ing. In any case, if the tyres have been onthe car for over 6 years, they should bechecked by specialised personnel, to see ifthey can still be used.

In the case of replacement, always fit newtyres, avoiding those of dubious origin.

Alfa 156 GTA uses Tubeless tyres.Never use an inner tube with these tyres.

If a tyre is changed, also change the in-flation valve

To allow even wear between the front andrear tyres, it is advisable to change themover every 10-15 thousand kilometres,keeping them on the same side of the carso as to not reverse the direction of rotation.

RUBBER HOSES

As far as the brake system and fuel sup-ply rubber hoses are concerned, carefully fol-low the Scheduled Maintenance Programmeof this chapter. Indeed ozone, high tem-peratures and prolonged lack of fluid in thesystem may cause hardening and crackingof the hoses, with possible leaks. Carefulcontrol is therefore necessary.

Do not cross switch the ty-res, moving them from the

right of the car to the left and vi-ce versa.

WARNING

Alloy rim painting involvingtemperatures exceeding

150°C should be avoided sincewheel mechanical characteristicscould be impaired.

WARNING

CAR M

AIN

TEN

AN

CE

233

Proceed as follows:

– Raise the windscreen wiper arm (A)and position the blade so that it forms anangle of 90° with the arm.

– Press tab (B) of the coupling spring andremove the blade to be replaced from thearm (A).

– When the spring is released from thecurved top of the arm, move the blade toallow the arm to be withdrawn through theslot.

– Insert a new blade passing it throughthe curved top of the arm (A) through theslot.

– Lift the blade to clamp tab (B) of thecoupling spring with the curved top of thearm.

– Lower the windscreen wiper arm.

IMPORTANT The blades may differ ac-cording to the versions. In any case, followthe instructions provided in the packs avail-able as spares from Alfa Romeo AuthorizedServices.

fig. 15

A0B0432m

Changing the windscreenwiper blade (fig. 15)

IMPORTANT The blade on driver’s sideis fitted with a spoiler that improves adhe-sion between the blade and the windscreen.To prevent improper fitting, before chang-ing the blade, check the spoiler direction ofthe blade to be replaced, then fit the newblade following the same spoiler direction.

WINDSCREENWIPER

BLADES

Periodically clean the rubber part using spe-cial products TUTELA PROFESSIONALSC 35 is recommended.

If the rubber blades are bent or worn theyshould be replaced. In any case they shouldbe changed once a year.

A few simple notions can reduce the pos-sibility of damage to the blades:

– If the temperature falls below zero,make sure that ice has not frozen the rub-ber against the glass. If necessary, thaw us-ing an antifreeze product.

– Remove any snow from the glass: in ad-dition to protecting the blades, this preventseffort on the motor and overheating.

– Do not operate the windscreen and rearwindow wipers on dry glass.

Driving with worn wiperblades is a serious hazard,

because visibility is reduced in badweather.

WARNING

CAR M

AIN

TEN

AN

CE

234

HEADLIGHT WASHERS

Regularly check that the spray jets are in-tact and clean (fig. 16).

If it is necessary to direct the jet, contactan Alfa Romeo Authorized Service.

BODYWORK

PROTECTION FROM ATMOSPHERIC AGENTS

The main causes of corrosion are:

– atmospheric pollution

– salty air and humidity (coastal areas, orhot humid climates)

– seasonal environment conditions.

Not to be underestimated is also the abra-sive action of wind-borne atmospheric dustand sand and mud and gravel raised by oth-er vehicles.

On your Alfa 156 GTA Alfa Romeohas implemented the best manufacturingtechnologies to effectively protect the body-work against corrosion.

fig. 16

A0B0379m

SPRAY JETS

Make sure that the windscreen and head-light (where applicable) washer jets deliv-er a jet of fluid which is adequate and cor-rectly directed.

If the spray devices are not working checkthat the supply circuit is not blocked. If nec-essary unblock the nozzles using a needle.

CAR M

AIN

TEN

AN

CE

235

RECOMMENDATIONS TO PRESERVE THE BODYWORK

Paint

The paintwork does not only serve an aes-thetic purpose but also protects the under-lying sheet metal.

In the case of deep scrapes or scores, youare advised to have the necessary touch-ing up carried out immediately to avoid theformation of rust.

Only original products should be used fortouching up paint (see “Bodywork paintidentification label“ in the “Technical spec-ifications“ chapter).

Normal paint maintenance consists inwashing at intervals depending on the con-ditions and environment of use. For exam-ple, in highly polluted areas, or if the roadsare sprayed with salt, it is wise to wash thecar more frequently.

Detersives pollute water.The car should therefore bewashed in areas equipped

for the collection and purificationof the liquid used in the washingprocess.

To correctly wash the car:

1) Remove the aerial from the roof to pre-vent damage to it if the car is washed inan automatic system.

2) Spray the body with a low pressurejet of water.

3) Pass a sponge moistened with a lightdetergent solution, rinsing the sponge fre-quently.

4) Rinse well with water and dry with ajet of air or a chamois leather.

When drying, take particular care with theless visible parts like door surrounds, bon-net and around the headlights where wa-ter may stagnate. The car should not be tak-en to a closed area immediately, but left inthe open so that residual water can evapo-rate.

These include:

– Painting products and systems whichgive the car particular resistance to corrosionand abrasion.

– Use of galvanised (or pretreated) steelsheets, with high resistance to corrosion.

– Spraying the underbody, engine com-partment, wheel arches and other parts withhighly protective wax products.

– Spraying of plastic parts, with a protec-tive function, in the more exposed points:underdoor, inner wheel arch linings, edges,etc.

– Use of “open“ boxed sections to pre-vent condensation and pockets of moisturefrom triggering rust inside.

VEHICLE EXTERIOR ANDUNDERBODY WARRANTY

The Alfa 156 GTA is guaranteedagainst perforation due to rust of any orig-inal element of the structure or body. For thegeneral terms of this warranty, refer to theWarranty Booklet.

CAR M

AIN

TEN

AN

CE

236

Detergents cause waterpollution. Therefore the en-gine compartment should

be washed in areas equipped forcollecting and purifying the liquidused in the washing process.

IMPORTANT The vehicle should washedwith the engine cold and the ignition key atSTOP. After washing make sure that thevarious protections (e.g. rubber caps andvarious covers) have not been damaged orremoved.

Do not wash the car after it has been leftin the sun or with the bonnet hot: this mayalter the shine of the paintwork.

Exterior plastic parts must be cleaned inthe same way as the rest of the vehicle.

Where possible, do not park under trees;the resinous substance many species releasegive the paint a dull appearance and in-crease the possibility of triggering rustprocesses.

IMPORTANT Bird droppings must bewashed off immediately and thoroughly asthe acid they contain is particularly aggres-sive.

Windows

Use specific products to clean the windows.Use clean cloths to avoid scratching or al-tering the transparency of the glass.

IMPORTANT The inside of therearscreen should be wiped gently with acloth in the direction of the filaments toavoid damaging the heating device.

Engine compartment

At the end of the winter the engine com-partment should be carefully washed, with-out directing the jet against electronic con-trol units. Contact a specialised workshop tohave this done.

CAR M

AIN

TEN

AN

CE

237

INTERIOR PLASTIC PARTS

Use appropriate products designed to pre-serve the appearance of components.

IMPORTANT Never use spirit or petro-leum to clean the glass of the instrumentpanel.

INTERIOR FITTINGS

Periodically check that water is not trappedunder the mats (due to water dripping offshoes, umbrellas, etc.) which could cause ox-idisation of the sheet metal.

CLEANING LEATHER SEATS

– Remove dried on dirt with a lightlymoistened chamois leather or cloth with-out pressing too hard.

– Remove liquid or grease stains with adry absorbent cloth without rubbing. Thenwipe with a soft cloth or chamois leatherwith water and neutral soap. If the stain per-sists, use specific products, carefully follow-ing the instructions for use

IMPORTANT Never use spirit or alcohol-based products.

Never use inflammableproducts like fuel oil ether

or rectified petrol for cleaning insi-de the car. The electrostatic di-scharges generated when rubbingto clean may cause fire.

WARNINGDo not keep aerosol cans inthe car. There is the risk

they might explode. Aerosol cansmust never be exposed to a tem-perature above 50°C. The tempe-rature inside the car might go wellbeyond that figure when exposedto the sun’s rays.

WARNING

ALF

A 1

56 G

TA S

PO

RTW

AG

ON

238

AALLFFAA 115566 GGTTAA SSPPOORRTTWWAAGGOONNOpening/closing from inside

– To open the door pull the handle(A-fig. 3).

– To close, press the knob (B-fig. 3), al-so with the door open, then shut the door.

fig. 1

A0B0077m

fig. 2

A0B0078m

fig. 3

A0B0079m

DOORS

REAR DOORS

Opening/closing from outside

– To open the door, only with the insideknob lifted (A-fig. 1), pull the openinghandle (B-fig. 2).

– To close, press the knob (A-fig. 1)also with the door open, then shut the door.

In this chapter you will find all the specif-ic information for Alfa 156 GTASportwagon that integrate and com-plete the previous chapters.

Rear doors can only beopened if the “child sa-

fety“ device is off.

WARNING

ALF

A 1

56 G

TA S

PO

RTW

AG

ON

239

CHILD SAFETY LOCK (fig. 4)

The rear doors are fitted with a locking de-vice (A) which prevents them from beingopened from inside.

WARNING Each device only acts on thedoor on which it is installed.

The device can only be engaged with thedoors open raising or lowering the controlwith the ignition key.

SEATS

REAR SEAT

Headrest

The car is fitted with two headrests for theside seats (fig. 5). On request for ver-sions/markets where applicable, the carmay also be fitted with a third headrest forthe central seat (fig. 6).

To pull out the third headrest, push it up-wards until hearing the stopping click.

fig. 4

A0B0080m

fig. 5

A0B0094m

Position 1 (control up) = Device engaged.

Position 2 (control down) = Device re-leased.

WARNING Also follow the instructionsgiven in the chapter “Getting to know yourcar“ under the paragraph “Child safetylock“.

Centre armrest

To use the centre armrest, lower it as il-lustrated (fig. 7), using the handle (A).

fig. 7

A0B0096m

ALF

A 1

56 G

TA S

PO

RTW

AG

ON

240

The third headrest (centre) is not remov-able, whereas the side headrests may beremoved as follows:

– Raise the headrests about 2 cm.

– Press the buttons (A and B-fig. 5) atthe same time and remove the headrests.

– To refit the headrests keep the buttonspressed (A and B-fig. 5) and insert themcompletely.

fig. 6

A0B0095m

Remember that the thirdheadrest (central) should

be pulled out completely so thatthe nape and not the neck rests onit. Only in this position does itexert its protective action if the caris hit from behind.

WARNING

ALF

A 1

56 G

TA S

PO

RTW

AG

ON

241

On request for versions/markets whereapplicable, the compartment can be fittedwith a bag for carrying skis.

WARNING Lay the bag in the passen-ger compartment before putting the skis in.After carrying skis, let the bag dry (if wet),then fold it correctly and insert it in the com-partment.

fig. 9

A0B0098m

fig. 8

A0B0097m

Ski compartment

This compartment can be used for carry-ing long loads.

To gain access to the compartment lowerthe armrest, pull the handle (A-fig. 8) andlower the lid on the armrest (fig. 9).

On versions fitted with the third headrest,before lowering the lid on the armrest, liftthe headrest completely and set the fabricprotection.

REARSCREEN WIPER –REARSCREEN WASHER

OPERATION (fig. 10)

This is only possible with the ignition keyat MAR.

To operate the rearscreen wiper turn theknob (A) to position (. The rearscreenwiper works intermittently.

Pushing the lever (B) forwards therearscreen washer jet comes into operationwhich is disengaged when the lever is re-leased.

With the rearscreen washer, the wipercomes into operation automatically for a fewseconds.

fig. 10

A0B0081m

ALF

A 1

56 G

TA S

PO

RTW

AG

ON

242

CHANGING THE BLADE(fig. 11)

The rearscreen wiper blade should be re-placed together with the arm.

To replace:

– mark the position of the blade in rela-tion to the rearscreen.

– Raise the lid (A), slacken the nut (B)and remove the arm (C).

– Correctly position the new arm and firm-ly tighten the fastening nut.

– Lower the lid.

LUGGAGECOMPARTMENT

The luggage compartment can be openedby remote control from outside pressing thebutton (C-fig. 14), also when the elec-tronic alarm is on.

WARNING If the tailgate is not shutproperly, this will be shown by the corre-sponding warning light ́ and warning mes-sage on the Infocenter display.

OPENING FROM INSIDE (fig. 13)

To open the tailgate from inside the pas-senger compartment pull the lever (A) atthe side of the driver’s seat.

fig. 11

A0B0082m

fig. 12

A0B0083m

fig. 13

A0B0042m

SPRAY JET (fig. 12)

If the jet does not spray, check that thereis fluid in the windscreen washer reservoir:see the corresponding paragraph in the chap-ter “Vehicle maintenance“. Then check thatthe holes on the jet (A) are not clogged andfree them using a pin, if necessary.

ALF

A 1

56 G

TA S

PO

RTW

AG

ON

243

Lifting the tailgate is facilitated by the ac-tion of the gas springs.

The gas springs are cali-brated to ensure correctlifting of the tailgate with

the weights foreseen by the man-ufacturer. The addition of objects(spoiler, etc.) may adversely affectcorrect operation and safety in useof the tailgate.

OPENING WITH REMOTECONTROL (fig. 14)

The boot can be opened by remote controlpressing the button (C-fig. 14) on the key,also when the electronic alarm is engaged.

In this case the alarm system switches offvolumetric protection and the tailgate con-trol sensor. The system also sounds twobeeps and the direction indicators light upfor three seconds (with the exception of ver-sions for certain markets.

Closing the boot again the control functionsare restored, the system sounds two beepsand the direction indicators light up for threeseconds (with the exception of versions forcertain markets.

fig. 14

A0B0743m

fig. 15

A0B0084m

CLOSING THE TAILGATE(fig. 15)

To lower the tailgate use the grip (A) onthe interior trim.

Only use the tailgate ope-ning lever with the car sta-

tionary.

WARNING

ALF

A 1

56 G

TA S

PO

RTW

AG

ON

244

RESTRAINING THE LOAD(fig. 16-17)

The loads carried can be held in place withthe belts hooked to the rings provided at thecorners of the boot.

The rings also serve for fastening the lug-gage retainer net (available on request forversions/markets where applicable c/o Al-fa Romeo Authorized Services).

REVERSIBLE MAT (fig. 18-19)

The central part (A-fig. 18) of the floortrim is reversible: it can be taken off, turnedover and inserted with side (B) upwards.

To put the mat back, insert the front edge(A-fig. 19) in the housing on the floor.

fig. 17

A0B0086m

fig. 19

A0B0088mfig. 18

A0B0087m

fig. 16

A0B0085m

ALF

A 1

56 G

TA S

PO

RTW

AG

ON

245

CAUTIONS FOR CARRYING LUGGAGE

On versions not fitted with the automaticrear geometry control system, when trav-elling at night with a load in the boot, it isnecessary to adjust the height of the lowbeams (see “Headlamps“ paragraph in thechapter “Getting to know your car“). Forcorrect use of the aiming device, also makesure that the load does not exceed the val-ues given in the same paragraph.

If you want to carry fuel ina reserve can, you should

comply with legal regulations, onlyusing a certified can suitably fa-stened to the load retainer rings atthe corner of the boot. However,remember that this increases therisk of fire in the event of an acci-dent.

WARNINGWhen using the boot, neverexceed the maximum per-

missible loads given in the “Tech-nical specifications“ chapter. Alsomake sure that the items containedin the boot are firmly secured, toprevent them being thrownforward and harming the passen-gers in the event of abrupt braking.

WARNING

Heavy luggage without re-straints could cause serious

harm to the passengers in an acci-dent.

WARNING

ALF

A 1

56 G

TA S

PO

RTW

AG

ON

246

ODDMENTS COMPARTMENT (fig. 20-21)

On the sides of the boot there are two re-cesses closed by a lid.

To open the cover, press button (A) andturn it downwards. As optional for ver-sions/markets where applicable, the odd-ment compartment on the left-hand side canbe provided with CD-Changer.

CURRENT SOCKET (optional forversions/markets whereapplicable) (fig. 22)

This is on the left-hand side of the boot.

To use the socket, open the lid (A). Thesocket is supplied with the ignition switch atMAR and can only be used with accessoriesthat absorb a maximum of 15A (power180W).

OBJECTS RETAINER NET

The net can be hooked in different posi-tions (fig. 26-27-28-29) using hous-ings (A and B-fig. 23) provided in thefront part of the boot and housings (C andD-fig. 24) in the rear part.

fig. 21

A0B0092m

fig. 20

A0B0091m

Do not connect accessorieswith higher absorption tothe socket. Prolonged cur-

rent absorption might drain the bat-tery preventing the engine from be-ing started.

fig. 22

A0B0093m

fig. 24

A0B0102m

fig. 23

A0B0101m

ALF

A 1

56 G

TA S

PO

RTW

AG

ON

247

To fasten the net, insert the hooks (A-fig. 25) in the housings (B-fig. 25) andpush downwards.

To release the net, pull it upwards keepingthe connection point pressed (C-fig. 25).

LUGGAGE COVER

The luggage cover (A-fig. 30) can berolled up and removed.

To roll, remove the two rear pins (B-fig. 31) from their housings.

WARNING Accompany the cover whenrolling, holding it by the handle (C-fig. 30).

fig. 25

A0B0103m

fig. 26

A0B0104m

fig. 28

A0B0106m

fig. 27

A0B0105m

fig. 30

A0B0108m

fig. 29

A0B0107m

ALF

A 1

56 G

TA S

PO

RTW

AG

ON

248

To remove the cover roll it and check thatthe passenger compartment separation netis also rolled (see following paragraph), thenpull the hooks back (A-fig. 32). Raise andremove the cover from the boot.

To put the cover back on, insert the endsof the reel in the respective housings, mak-ing sure that the catches are correctly lockedforwards making the green symbols at thebase of the actual button visible, then pullit by the handle (C-fig. 30) and hook thetwo rear pins (B-fig. 31).

UPPER PASSENGERCOMPARTMENT SEPARATIONNET (fig. 33-34)

The upper separation net between the pas-senger compartment and the boot is con-tained in the luggage cover reel (A).

To lay the net, remove it from the reel andhook the ends in the two housings (B).

To rewind the net, release the ends fromthe housings (B) and accompany it as itwinds.

To avoid damage to thecover do not rest any ob-jects on it.

fig. 31

A0B0109m

fig. 32

A0B0110m

fig. 33

A0B0111m

In the event of an accidentor abrupt braking any

objects on top of the cover mightbe thrown into the passenger com-partment, with the risk of harmingthe occupants; use of the passen-ger compartment separation net isrecommended.

WARNING

ALF

A 1

56 G

TA S

PO

RTW

AG

ON

249

LOWER PASSENGERCOMPARTMENT SEPARATIONNET (fig. 35-36)(optional for versions/markets where applicable)

The lower passenger compartment andboot separation net (A) is contained in thereel fastened under the housing of the lug-gage cover.

To lay the net remove it from the reel andfasten the hooks (B) to the rings (C).

To rewind the net, release the hooks (B)from the rings (C) and accompany it whileit winds.

EXTENDING THE BOOT

The split rear seat makes partial (1/3 or2/3) or total extension of the boot possi-ble.

To use the maximum loading volume, re-move the luggage cover following the in-structions given in the corresponding para-graph.

1/3 Partial extension (fig. 37)

Extension of the left-hand side of the bootmakes it possible to carry two passengerson the right-hand part of the rear seat.

fig. 34

A0B0112m

fig. 36

A0B0114m

fig. 35

A0B0113m

fig. 37

A0B0115m

ALF

A 1

56 G

TA S

PO

RTW

AG

ON

250

2/3 Partial extension (fig. 38)

Extension of the right-hand side of the bootmakes it possible to carry one passenger onthe left-hand part of the rear seat.

Total extension (fig. 39)

Completely folding the rear seat makes themaximum load volume available.

To extend the boot

– Check that the lateral safety belt buckles(A-fig. 40) are located in their pockets onthe seat back and that the tab (B-fig. 40)of the central abdominal safety belts is hookedonto the support (C-fig. 40).

– Remove the roll with the luggage cov-er.

– Tilt the cushions forward pulling fromthe handle (A-fig. 41) at the centre ofeach cushion.

– remove the side headrests from the rearseat and insert them in the special housingson the cushions (fig. 42).

– If the car is fitted with the third head-rest from the centre of the seat, lower itcompletely.

fig. 39

A0B0117m

fig. 38

A0B0116m

fig. 40

A0B0118m

fig. 41

A0B0119m

ALF

A 1

56 G

TA S

PO

RTW

AG

ON

251

– Release the seat back catch raising thehandle (A-fig. 43) for the right seat backand handle (B-fig. 44) for the left seatback.

– Fold the seat backs forward to obtaina single loading surface with the boot floor.

To take the seats backto the normal position

– Move the seat backs to the vertical po-sition making sure that they are caught cor-rectly.

WARNING The seat backs are correct-ly caught when the button (A-fig. 45)next to each handle (B-fig. 45) is back inthe handle.

– Remove the headrest and tilt the cush-ion backward, making sure that the safetybelts do not remain twisted in the hiddensection between the cushion and seat back.

– Refit the headrest on the seat back.

– Refit the roll with the luggage cover.

fig. 44

A0B0122m

fig. 43

A0B0121m

fig. 45

A0B0123m

fig. 42

A0B0120m

ALF

A 1

56 G

TA S

PO

RTW

AG

ON

252

REFUELLING

EMERGENCY FUELFLAP OPENING (fig. 47)

If the fuel flap opening lever fails to work,pull the emergency cord (A) on the right-hand side of the boot.

INTERNAL FITTINGS

GRAB HANDLES (fig. 46)

There are two grab handles in correspon-dence with the front doors.

Two grab handles (A) are located abovethe rear doors fitted with a coat hook (B).

fig. 47

A0B0125m

fig. 46

A0B0124m

SOUND SYSTEM

The fixed sound system, with CD playerwith parametric sound equalizer has beendesigned to suit the specific characteris-tics of the passenger compartment, witha personalised design that matches thestyle of the dashboard. The sound systeminstructions for use are described in the at-tached supplement.

ALF

A 1

56 G

TA S

PO

RTW

AG

ON

253

IF AN EXTERIOR LIGHT GOES OUT

WARNING Before changing a bulb, readthe warnings and precautions given in thechapter “In an emergency“.

REVERSING LIGHTS AND REAR FOG GUARDS

To change the bulbs (Type B, 21W):

– Open the tailgate.

– Remove the cover (A or B-fig. 48)in correspondence with the light concerned,withdrawing it at the side.

fig. 48

A0B0128m

– Remove the bulb holder unit (D-fig. 49) pressing on the retainer tabs (E-fig. 49).

– Remove and replace the bulb concerned(spherical with bayonet coupling) pressinglightly and turning counterclockwise (fig. 50):

(F) reversing light bulb

(G) rear fog guard bulb.

fig. 49

A0B0129m

– Reinsert the bulb holder unit fitting itcorrectly between the retainer tabs (E-fig. 49).

– Refit the lid (A or B-fig. 48) insertingit from outside until it fits in.

fig. 50

A0B0130m

ALF

A 1

56 G

TA S

PO

RTW

AG

ON

254

– Reinsert the bulb holder unit fitting theretainer tabs correctly (B-fig. 52).

– Refit the protective cover (B-fig. 51)fastening with nuts (A-fig. 51).

DIRECTION INDICATORS AND SIDE/STOP LIGHTS

To replace the bulbs (Type B, 21W direc-tion indicators, 5/21W side/stop lights):

– Open the tailgate.

– Slacken the two fastening nuts (A-fig. 51) and remove the protective cov-er (B-fig. 51).

– Remove the bulb holder unit (A-fig. 52) pressing on the retainer tab (B-fig. 52).

– Remove and replace the bulb concerned(spherical with bayonet coupling) pressinglightly and turning counterclockwise (fig. 53):

(C) side light/stop light

(D) direction indicator.

fig. 52

A0B0132m

fig. 51

A0B0131m

fig. 53

A0B0133m

ALF

A 1

56 G

TA S

PO

RTW

AG

ON

255

– Remove the bulb holder (C-fig. 55)turning clockwise and replace the bulb(D-fig. 55) which snaps on.

– Refit the bulb holder (C-fig. 55) turn-ing clockwise.

– Refit the complete unit (B-fig. 54)firstly inserting the catches and then press-ing in correspondence with the stopper(A-fig. 54).

fig. 55

A0B0135m

fig. 56

A0B0136m

fig. 54

A0B0134m

NUMBER PLATE LIGHTS

To replace the bulbs (Type A, 5W):

– Remove the number plate light unit us-ing a flat-tipped screwdriver protected by asoft cloth on the catch (A-fig. 54).

– Remove the unit (B-fig. 54).

ADDITIONAL STOP LIGHTS(3rd STOP)

The additional stop light is built into therear spoiler (fig. 56).

Refer to the Alfa Romeo Authorized Ser-vices for its replacement.

ALF

A 1

56 G

TA S

PO

RTW

AG

ON

256

TAILGATE LIGHT

To change the bulb (Type C, 10W):

– Open the tailgate.

– Remove the light (A-fig. 57) leveringwith a flat-tipped screwdriver in the pointshown.

IF AN INTERIORLIGHTS GOES OUT

WARNING Before changing a bulb, readthe warnings and precautions given in thechapter “In an emergency“.

– Remove the bulb (B-fig. 58) pullingoutwards and releasing it from the side con-tacts.

– Insert the new bulb fitting it correctly be-tween the contacts.

– Refit the light inserting it and then press-ing until the catch clicks into place.

fig. 57

A0B0139m

fig. 58

A0B0140m

ALF

A 1

56 G

TA S

PO

RTW

AG

ON

257

IF A FUSE BLOWS

The specific fuse for Sportwagon versionsis located in the central fuseholder above themain fusebox and access to it is gained re-moving the protective panel.

WARNING Before changing a fuse or re-lay, read the warnings and precautions giv-en in the chapter “In an emergency“.

System/Component Fuse no. Amperage Location

Additional current socket in the boot 10 20A fig. 59

fig. 59

A0B0141m

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFIC

ATI

ON

S

258

BODY LABEL

The body label carrying the following in-formation is located in the engine bay to oneside of the right-hand shock absorber up-per connection:

– Type of vehicle: ZAR 932000

– Manufacturer’s serial number (chassisnumber).

For some versions/markets the markingis partially covered by a protection. To seethe marking completely, remove the capturning counter-clockwise and raise the pro-tection.

ENGINE LABELS

On the rear left-hand side, gearbox side.IDENTIFICATION DATA

The identification data should be recorded.The identification data is carried on labels lo-cated in the following positions (fig. 1-2):1 - Identification label2 - Body label3 - Bodywork paint identification label– Saloon versions = fig. 1– Sportwagon versions = fig. 24 - Engine label.

TTEECCHHNNIICCAALL SSPPEECCIIFFIICCAATTIIOONNSS

fig. 1

A0B0057m

fig. 2

A0B0058m

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFIC

ATI

ON

S

259fig. 3

A0B0059m

BODYWORK PAINT IDENTIFICATION LABEL

On the Saloon versions, the plate is ap-plied in the internal part of the luggage com-partment (3-fig. 1), while on the Sport-wagon versions it is applied on the right-hand internal edge of the tailgate (3-fig. 2). The plate carries the following da-ta (fig. 3):

A. Paint manufacturer

B. Name of colour

C. Colour code.

D. Colour code for touching up and re-spraying.

IDENTIFICATION LABEL

This is located in the engine bay on thefront crossmember (fig. 4).

It carries the following identification da-ta:

A. Space for details of national ho-mologation

B. Space for punching the consecutivechassis number

C. Space available for maximumweights authorised by various national laws

D. Space for version and any supple-mentary indications to those specified

E. Space for smoke index (Diesel ver-sions only)

F. Space for punching manufacturer’sname.

fig. 4

A0B0076m

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFIC

ATI

ON

S

260

Body code

ENGINE AND BODY VERSION CODES

(Sportwagon versions)

932BXB00 47 C

932BXB01 49 C

(Saloon versions)

932AXB00 46 C

932AXB01 48 C

Engine code

932A000

932A000

3.2 V6 24V

3.2 V6 24V Selespeed

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFIC

ATI

ON

S

261

Code type

Cycle

Number and position of cylinders

Piston bore and stroke mm

Total displacement cm3

Maximum horsepower (EEC):kWHP

at rpm

Maximum torque (EEC):Nm

kgmat rpm

Spark plugs

Fuel

ENGINE3.2 V6 24V

932A000

Otto

6 in 60° V

93 x 78

3179

1842506200

30030.64800

NGK R PFR6B

Unleadedpetrol

95 RON

3.2 V6 24VSelespeed

932A000

Otto

6 in 60° V

93 x 78

3179

1842506200

30030.64800

NGK R PFR6B

Unleadedpetrol

95 RON

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFIC

ATI

ON

S

262

Supply

Firing order

FUEL SUPPLY

TRANSMISSION

Gearbox

Clutch

Drive

3.2 V6 24V

Electronic injection Multi Point

1-4-2-5-3-6

3.2 V6 24V Selespeed

Electronic injection Multi Point

1-4-2-5-3-6

3.2 V6 24V Selespeed

Six forward gearsand reverse with electronic control

Dry single disk with electrohydraulic control

Front

3.2 V6 24V

Six forward gears plus reverse all synchronised

Dry single disk withhydraulic control

Front

Alterations or repairs to the supply system not carried out correctly or without taking account ofthe technical specifications of the system, may cause abnormal functioning with the risk of fire.

WARNING

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFIC

ATI

ON

S

263

SPARK PLUGS

Clean, intact spark plugs are determinantwith regard to engine efficiency and for re-ducing the emission of pollutants.

Spark plugs should be re-placed at the intervalsspecified in the Scheduled

maintenance programme. Only usespark plugs of the specified type:if the thermal capacity is inade-quate or if the envisaged life is notguaranteed inconveniences may en-sue.

BRAKES

Service brakes: – front

– rear

Parking brake

If examined by an expert eye, the ap-pearance of a spark plug is a sound cluefor locating a fault, even if not involving theignition system. Therefore if you are expe-riencing any engine problems, it is impor-tant to have the spark plugs checked by Al-fa Romeo Authorized Services.

STEERING

Type

Turning radius (between pavements)

3.2 V6 24V

Diskself-ventilated

Disk

3.2 V6 24V 3.2 V6 24V Selespeed

Rack and pinion.Hydraulic power steering with liquid reservoir in engine compartment

11.6 m 11.6 m

3.2 V6 24V Selespeed

Diskself-ventilated

Disk

Wheel anti-look system (ABS) with electronic braking distribution.Servo-brake. Electronic control with brake pad wear sensors. Gaskets of ecological type.

Controlled by hand lever operating rear brakes.

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFIC

ATI

ON

S

264

WHEELS

Standard fittings

Rims

Tyres

Optional fittingsTyres

Winter tyres

(*) WARNING Chainable tyres; see paragraph "Snow chains" in section "Correct use of the car".

3.2 V6 24V Selespeed

7.5J x 17“ (alloy)

225/45 ZR17“ 91Y(unchainable tyres)

215/45 R17” 87W (*)215/45 ZR17” 87W (*)

225/45 ZR17“ 91Q (M+S)(unchainable tyres)

3.2 V6 24V

7.5J x 17“ (alloy)

225/45 ZR17“ 91Y(unchainable tyres)

215/45 R17” 87W (*)215/45 ZR17” 87W (*)

225/45 ZR17“ 91Q (M+S)(unchainable tyres)

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFIC

ATI

ON

S

265

(•) Unchainable tyres.

(*) WARNING Chainable tyres; see paragraph "Snow chains" in section "Correct use of the car".

With the tyre hot the inflating pressure should be +0.3 bar compared with the specified rating. Recheck pressure value with cold tyres.

With winter tyres the inflation pressure should be +0.2 bar compared with the specified rating.

TYRES INFLATION PRESSURES COLD

Tyres215/45 R17“ (*)front rear

2.4 2.4

2.6 2.6

Tyres225/45 ZR17“ (•)front rear

2.5 2.3

2.8 2.6

Tyres215/45 ZR17“ (*)front rear

2.4 2.4

2.6 2.6

Reduced load (2 occupants) bar

Full load bar

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFIC

ATI

ON

S

266

RIMS AND TYRES

Alloy rims.

Radial Tubeless tyres.

The Log book shows all the homologatedtyres.

WARNING In the event of any discrep-ancies between this Handbook and the ve-hicle Log Book, only the latter should be con-sidered.

While the specified dimensions remain thesame, for driving safety, the vehicle must befitted with tyres of the same brand and typeon all wheels.

WARNING Do not use inner tubes withTubeless tyres.

CORRECT TYRE READING (fig. 5)

Below are the instructions necessary toknow the meaning of the code stamped onthe tyre.

The code may be like one of the examplesgiven below.

Load index (capacity)

60 = 250 kg61 = 257 kg62 = 265 kg63 = 272 kg64 = 280 kg65 = 290 kg66 = 300 kg67 = 307 kg68 = 315 kg69 = 325 kg70 = 335 kg71 = 345 kg72 = 355 kg73 = 365 kg74 = 375 kg75 = 387 kg76 = 400 kg77 = 412 kg78 = 425 kg79 = 437 kg80 = 450 kg81 = 462 kg82 = 475 kg83 = 487 kg

84 = 500 kg85 = 515 kg86 = 530 kg87 = 545 kg88 = 560 kg89 = 580 kg90 = 600 kg91 = 615 kg92 = 630 kg93 = 650 kg94 = 670 kg95 = 690 kg96 = 710 kg97 = 730 kg98 = 750 kg99 = 775 kg100 = 800 kg101 = 825 kg102 = 850 kg103 = 875 kg104 = 900 kg105 = 925 kg106 = 950 kg

Example:

225/45 ZR17 91Y

225 = Nominal width (S, distancein mm between sides).

45 = Percentage height/width ratio(H/S).

ZR = Radial tyre with speed above240 kph.

17 = Rim diameter in inches (Ø).

91 = Load index (capacity).

Y = Maximum speed index.

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFIC

ATI

ON

S

267

Example:

7.5 J x 17 H2 ET 43

Maximum speed index

Q = up to 160 km/h

R = up to 170 km/h

S = up to 180 km/h

T = up to 190 km/h

U = up to 200 km/h

H = up to 210 km/h

V = up to 240 km/h

W = up to 270 km/h

Y = up to 300 km/h

Maximum speed index for snow tyres

Q M + S = up to 160 km/h

T M + S = up to 190 km/h

H M + S = up to 210 km/h

CORRECT RIM READING

Below are the instructions necessary toknow the meaning of the code stamped onthe rim, as shown in (fig. 5).

fig. 5

A0B0395m

7.5 = rim width in inches (1)

J = rim drop centre outline (side pro-jection where the tyre bead rests(2)

17 = rim nominal diameter in inches(corresponds to diameter of thetyre to be mounted) (3 = Ø)

H2 = “hump“ shape and number (reliefon the circumference holding theTubeless tyre bead on the rim)

ET 43 = camber angle (distance be-tween disk/rim line and wheelrim centre line)

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFIC

ATI

ON

S

268

– camber

Front wheels: – caster

– toe-in

Rear wheels:– camber

– toe-in

WHEEL GEOMETRY

3.2 V6 24V - 3.2 V6 24V Selespeed

– 0° 24´ ± 20´

4° 6´ ± 30´

–2 ± 0.6 mm (*) (–18 ± 5)

– 1° 12´ ± 20´

2.5 ± 1 mm (*) (23´ ± 9)

(*) The toe-in value, primes to mm conversion, is always calculated taking into account a 15" rim regardless of rims actually used. Should it be impossibleto set the 15" rim at the test bench, refer to primes value. The toe-in value, tolerance included, shall always be evenly distributed between the two wheels.

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFIC

ATI

ON

S

269

PERFORMANCE

SPORTWAGONVERSIONS

Maximum speed

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h

Kilometer with standing start

SALOONVERSIONS

Maximum speed

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h

Kilometer with standing start

3.2 V6 24V

250 km/h

6.3 s

25.9 s

3.2 V6 24VSelespeed

250 km/h

6.3 s

25.9 s

3.2 V6 24V

250 km/h

6.3 s

25.9 s

3.2 V6 24VSelespeed

250 km/h

6.3 s

25.9 s

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFIC

ATI

ON

S

270

DIMENSIONS

fig. 6

A0B0342m

Dimensions are expressed in mm

Height indicated is for an unladen car

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFIC

ATI

ON

S

271

fig. 7

Dimensions are expressed in mm

Height indicated is for an unladen car

A0B0341m

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFIC

ATI

ON

S

272

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT - SALOON VERSIONS

WEIGHTS - SALOON VERSIONS

Capacity (dm3)

Kerb weight

Max. permitted weight (*)

Payload includingdriver (**)

(*) Weight not to be exceeded. The Driver must arrange the goods in the luggage compartment and/or load surface so that they comply with these limits.

(**) If special equipment is fitted (sunroof etc.) the unladen weight increases, thus reducing the payload as specified in the maximum weight allowed.

3.2 V6 24V Selespeed

378

3.2 V6 24V

378

3.2 V6 24V

1410 kg

1910 kg

500 kg

3.2 V6 24V Selespeed

1410 kg

1910 kg

500 kg

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFIC

ATI

ON

S

273

WEIGHTS - SPORTWAGON VERSIONS

Capacity (dm3)

Capacity withrear seat backfolded (dm3)

Kerb weight

Max. permitted weight (*)

Payload includingdriver (**)

(*) Weight not to be exceeded. The Driver must arrange the goods in the luggage compartment and/or load surface so that they comply with these limits.

(**) If special equipment is fitted (sunroof etc.) the unladen weight increases, thus reducing the payload as specified in the maximum weight allowed.

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT - SPORTWAGON VERSIONS

3.2 V6 24V

360

1180

3.2 V6 24V Selespeed

360

1180

3.2 V6 24V Selespeed

1460 kg

1955 kg

495 kg

3.2 V6 24V

1460 kg

1955 kg

495 kg

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFIC

ATI

ON

S

274

REFILLING

Fuel tank: litres– including a reserve of litres

Engine cooling system litres

Oil sump and filter litres

Mechanical gearbox/differential litres

Selespeed gearboxactuation hydraulic system litres

Windscreen washer and rearscreenwasher fluid reservoir: litres

– with headlamp washer litres

3.2 V6 24V

637

9.2

5.90

2.0

–

2.55.3

3.2 V6 24V Selespeed

637

9.2

5.90

2.0

0.6

2.55.3

Specified fuelsRecommended products

Unleaded Premium petrolwith no less than 95 R.O.N

Mixture of distilled water andPARAFLU 11 (blue) at 50% orPARAFLU UP (red) at 50%

SELENIA RACING

TUTELA CAR MATRYX

TUTELA CAR CS SPEED

Mixture of water and liquidTUTELA PROFESSIONAL SC 35

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFIC

ATI

ON

S

275

FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS

USABLE PRODUCTS AND THEIR SPECIFICATIONS

WARNING Do not top up with oil with different specifications that the oil already in the engine.

Use Quality features of fluids and lubricants Recommended fluids Applicationsfor correct vehicle operation and lubricants

Lubricants forpetrol engines

SAE 10W-60 synthetic lubricant SELENIA RACING

A0B

0019

m

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFIC

ATI

ON

S

276

Use

Brake fluid

Protective agent for radiators

Windscreen/rearscreen/headlampwasher fluid

(*) IMPORTANT Do not add or mix with fluids with specifications other than the specified ones.

Recommended fluidsand lubricants

TUTELA CARMATRYX

TUTELA CAR CS SPEED

TUTELA GI/A

TUTELA MRM 2

TUTELA CAR TOP 4 for Alfa Romeo

PARAFLU 11 (*)

or

PARAFLU UP (*)

TUTELAPROFESSIONALSC 35

Applications

Mechanical gearbox anddifferential

Selespeed transmissionelectrically-operatedelectrohydraulic drive

Hydraulic power steering

C.V. joints

Hydraulic brake and clutch control

Cooling ductsPercentage:50% down to –35°C

To be used neat or diluted

Lubricants andgreasesfor transmissions

Quality features of fluids and lubricantsfor correct vehicle operation

SAE 75W-85 synthetic oil. Meets API GL 4 and MIL-L-2105 D LEV specifications

ATF DEXRON III type oil

ATF DEXRON II D LEV type oil

Lithium-soap-based grease with molybdenum bisulphate.Consistency NLGI 2

F.M.V.S.S. n° 116 DOT 4, ISO 4925, SAE J1704, CUNA NC 956-01 synthetic fluid

Protective with antifreeze action, blue color, based on inhibited monoethyleneglycol, CUNA NC 956-16

Protective with antifreeze action, red colour, based on inhibited monoethylenglycol, with O.A.T.-based organic formula, that passes CUNA NC 956-16,ASTM D 3306 specifications

Mixture of spirits and surface-active agents CUNA NC 956-11

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFIC

ATI

ON

S

277

FUEL CONSUMPTION

The fuel consumption values shown in thefollowing tables were established during ho-mologation tests prescribed in specific Eu-ropean Directives.

The test conditions adopted include the fol-lowing:

– an urban cycle: this includes coldstarting followed by simulation of a mixedurban route;

– an extraurban cycle: this includesfrequent accelerating in all gears, simulat-ing normal extraurban use of the vehicle;the speed varies between 0 and 120 kph;

– combined consumption: this is cal-culated by considering a route consisting ofabout 37% urban cycle and 63% extraur-ban cycle.

WARNING The type of route, traf-fic conditions, weather conditions,driving style, conditions of the ve-hicle, trim level/equipment/ acces-sories, vehicle load, presence of roofrack, use of the climate control sys-tem, other items that negatively af-fect the aerodynamics of the vehi-cle or wind resistance lead to dif-ferent fuel consumption levels thanthose measured by the above-men-tioned procedures (see “Reducingrunning costs and environment pol-lution“ in the chapter “Correct useof the car“).

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFIC

ATI

ON

S

278

SALOON VERSIONS

Urban

Extraurban

Combined

3.2 V6 24V

18.1

8.6

12.1

3.2 V6 24V Selespeed

18.1

8.6

12.1

SPORTWAGON VERSIONS

Urban

Extraurban

Combined

3.2 V6 24V

18.4

8.8

12.3

3.2 V6 24V Selespeed

18.4

8.8

12.3

CONSUMPTION ACCORDING TO EEC 1999/100/ (litres x 100 km)

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFIC

ATI

ON

S

279

CO2EMISSIONS

SPORTWAGON VERSIONS

Value (g/km)

3.2 V6 24V

293

3.2 V6 24V Selespeed

293

SALOON VERSIONS

Value (g/km)

3.2 V6 24V

287

3.2 V6 24V Selespeed

287

The CO2emission levels shown in the following tables are measured on a mixed cycle.

CO2EMISSIONS ACCORDING TO DIRECTIVE 1999/100/EC (g/km)

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFIC

ATI

ON

S

280

RADIO FREQUENCY REMOTE CONTROL:MINISTERIAL HOMOLOGATIONS

International code

A

B

CH

D

DK

E

EST

F

GB

GR

I

IRL

IS

L

N

NL

P

S

SF

Country

Austria

Belgium

Switzerland

Germany

Denmark

Spain

Estonia

France

Great Britain

Greece

Italy

Eire

Island

Luxembourg

Norway

Netherlands

Portugal

Sweden

Finland

Certification number

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFIC

ATI

ON

S

281

ALP

HABET

ICAL

INDEX

282

AALLPPHHAABBEETTIICCAALL IINNDDEEXX

ABD system .............................. 155

ABS .......................................... 152

Air bags, front and side

- deactivating passenger’s air bag .................................. 42

- front air bags ......................... 40

- general cautions ..................... 45

- passenger side front air bag ..... 43

- side air bags (side bag - window bag) .......... 43

Air filter

- check and replacement ...... 225

- Air recirculation ................ 116

Air vents .............................. 100-101

Alfa 156 GTA Sportwagon ... 238

Alfa Romeo CODE system ............. 6

Antievaporation system ................ 161

Ashtray

- front ..................................... 140

- rear ...................................... 141

ASR system ................................ 154

Battery .................................... 226

- advice for prolonging life .......... 229

- charging .......................... 208-228

- checking the charge ................ 228

- replacement ........................... 229

- starting with an auxiliarybattery .................................. 208

Body (cleaning) ................... 234-235

- body versions.......................... 260

Body marking ............................. 258

Bonnet ...................................... 148

Boot

- capacity .................... 272-273

- lighting ................................. 147

- opening from inside ................ 146

- opening with remote control .............................. 8-146

- passenger compartment separation net (lower) ............. 249

- passenger compartment separation net (upper) ............ 248

- securing the load .................... 147

- tailgate closing ....................... 147

- warnings for carrying luggage ... 148

Boot extension

- partial ............................. 249-250

- total ..................................... 250

Boot light

- changing bulb ........................ 199

- courtesy light ......................... 139

Brake and clutch fluid

- checking level and topping up ... 223

- handbrake ............................. 125

- specifications ......................... 263

Bulbs (replacement) .................... 183

Car lifting

- with arm hoist......................... 211

- with workshop hoist ................ 211

ALP

HABET

ICAL

INDEX

283

Car maintenance ................... 214

Carrying children safely ................ 33

Catalyst ..................................... 161

Changing battery of keywith remote control .................. 10

Changing bulbs ........................... 183

- general instructions ................. 184

- types of bulbs .................. 184-185

Charging the battery .................... 228

Checking levels ........................... 219

- brake and clutch fluid .............. 223

- engine coolant ....................... 222

- engine oil .............................. 220

- power steering oil ................... 222

- Selespeed gearbox oil ............. 221

- windscreen/headlamp washing fluid ........... 224

Child safety device (doors) ........... 19

Child’s seats(compliance with regulations) .... 36

Children (carrying safely) ............. 33

Cigar lighter ............................... 140

Cleaning and maintenance

- car exterior ...................... 234-235

- car interior ............................. 237

- engine compartment ............... 236

- leather seats .......................... 237

- plastic parts ........................... 237

- windows ............................... 236

Climate control system ................. 99

Climate control system, automatic two-zone .................. 101

Clock ......................................... 56

Clutch

- checking fluid level and topping up ....................... 223

CO2 emissions ............................ 279

CODE card .................................. 7

Control buttons ........................... 61

Controls ..................................... 122

Correct use of the car ........... 162

Courtesy light ............................. 139

Cruise control (constant speed adjustment) ...... 52

Current socket ............................ 246

Dashboard ................................ 55

Dashboard lighting dimming ......... 123

Demisting-defrosting

- rearscreen and door mirrors ...... 24

- windscreen and side windows.... 119

Dimensions .......................... 270-271

Direction indicators

- changing front bulbs ......... 189

- changing rear bulbs ................. 194

- changing side bulbs ................. 192

- switching on .......................... 48

Door mirrors (adjustment) ........ 23

Doors

- central locking ........................ 18

- opening/closing from inside...... 18

- opening/closing from outside ... 17

- remote locking/unlocking ........ 8

EBD ......................................... 93

Economy and environment-friendly driving ......................... 170

Electronic alarm system ................ 11

ALP

HABET

ICAL

INDEX

284

- ministerial homologation .......... 15

- shutting off the system ............ 15

- switching off .......................... 13

- switching on .......................... 12

- volumetric protection ............... 14

Electronic control units ................. 230

Emergency starting ............... 164-175

Engine

- identification codes ................. 260

- marking ................................ 258

- opening the bonnet ................. 148

- specifications ......................... 261

- switching off .......................... 163

- warming ............................... 163

Engine codes .............................. 260

Engine compartment

- bonnet .................................. 148

- cleaning ................................ 236

Engine coolant

- checking level and topping up ... 222

- temperature gauge and warning light .......................... 57

Engine oil

- checking level and topping up.... 220

- consumption .......................... 220

Environment (safeguarding) ......... 160

EOBD system .............................. 156

First-aid kit ................................ 213

Fix&Go (quick tyre repair kit) ........ 178

Flashing high beams .................... 48

Fluids and lubricants (specifications) ........................ 275

Front foglights

- changing bulbs ....................... 190

- switching on .......................... 122

Front roof light ........................... 138

- changing bulbs ....................... 196

Front seats

- adjustments ........................... 20

- electric heating ....................... 21

- rear pockets ........................... 21

Fuel

- consumption .................... 277-278

- fuel cap ................................. 159

- inertial fuel cut-off switch ......... 123

- level gauge and reserve warning light .......................... 57

- refuelling ............................... 274

Fuel flap .................................... 159

- emergency opening .......... 160-252

Fuel level gauge and reserve warning light ................ 57

Fuel reserve ............................... 274

Fuel supply ................................ 262

Fuel tank (capacity) .................... 274

Fuses

- list of protected devices ........... 204

- fuses in fusebox on dashboard .. 201

- fuses in fusebox on battery pole ........................... 201

- fuses in engine compartment .... 203

- fuses in the glovebox .............. 202

- generalities ............................ 200

Getting to know your car ... 6

Glovebox ................................... 137

Glovebox light

- changing bulbs ....................... 198

ALP

HABET

ICAL

INDEX

285

- rear lights .............................. 139

Grab handles ........................ 138-252

Handbrake lever ........................ 125

Hazard lights

- switching on .......................... 122

Headlamp aiming device .............. 150

Headlamp washer ................... 51-234

Headlamps ................................. 150

- beam aiming ......................... 150

- compensation for tilt ............... 150

- front foglight adjustment .......... 151

- gas discharge headlamps ......... 151

Headlight corrector ...................... 124

Headrests

- rear ...................................... 22

Heating

- automatic two-zone climate control ....................... 101

High beam headlamps

- changing bulbs ................. 188-192

- switching on .......................... 47

Identification data ...................... 258

Ignition device ............................ 16

In an emergency .................... 175

In the event of an accident ........... 212

- if anybody is injured ................ 212

Infocenter display ........................ 59

Inside rear-view mirror (adjustment) ........................... 23

Instrument cluster ....................... 56

- lighting adjustment ................. 123

Interior (cleaning) ....................... 237

Interior lighting

- boot lighting .......................... 147

- dashboard lighting (dimming) .. 123

- glove compartment lighting ...... 137

- infocenter display lighting ........ 58

Internal fittings ..................... 137-252

Isofix (child’s seat)....................... 37

Key.......................................... 6

- replacing remote control battery .. 10

Lambda sensors ......................... 161

Low beam headlamps

- changing bulbs ................. 187-190

- switching on .......................... 47

Luggage compartment cover .......... 247

Luggage retainer net ............. 246-247

Maintenance

- additional operations................ 217- annual inspection plan ............. 217

- scheduled maintenance ........... 214

- scheduled maintenanceprogramme ............................ 215

Mechanical gearbox

- lever ..................................... 126

Number plate lights

- changing bulbs ....................... 195

Oddment recesses ..................... 141

Paintwork (maintenance) ........... 235

- colour label ............................ 259

Parking ...................................... 164

ALP

HABET

ICAL

INDEX

286

Performance ............................... 269

Pollen filter ................................ 226

Pockets on doors ......................... 142

Power steering

- checking fluid level andtopping up ............................. 222

Power windows .......................... 24

- front ..................................... 24

- rear ...................................... 25

Pretensioners .............................. 30

Protecting devices thatreduce emissions ...................... 170

Radio transmitters and cellular telephones .................... 143

Rain sensor ................................ 50

Rear fog guards

- changing bulbs ....................... 193

- switching on .......................... 123

Rear roof lights ..................... 139-140

- changing bulbs ................. 197-198

Rear seat

- centre armrest ........................ 21

- headrests .............................. 22

- ski compartment .................... 22

Rearscreen heating .................. 24-120

Rearscreen washer ...................... 241

- blade .................................... 241

- spray jet ................................ 242

Rearscreen wiper

- blade replacement .................. 241

- operation ............................... 241

Reducing running costs and environment pollution ......... 168

Refuelling .................................. 274

Remote control

- additional remote controls ........ 12

- alarm system ......................... 11

- changing battery .................... 10

- door opening-closing ............... 7

- ministerial homologation ..... 15-280

Rev counter ................................ 57

Reversing light

- changing bulbs ....................... 193

Rubber hoses .............................. 232

Safe driving .............................. 164

Safeguarding the environment ...... 160

Scheduled maintenance programme ............................. 215

Seat belts

- carrying children safely ............ 33

- rear centre lap belt .................. 28

- front and rear belt height adjustment ............................ 29

- general instructions for use ....... 31

- maintenance .......................... 32

- pretensioners ......................... 30

- rear abdominal centre belt housing.................................. 28

- use of seat belts ..................... 26

Securing the load ........................ 147

Selespeed gearbox ...................... 127

Side lights

- changing front bulbs ......... 189-191

- changing rear bulbs ................. 194

- switching on .......................... 47

Ski compartment ........................ 22

ALP

HABET

ICAL

INDEX

287

Snow chains ............................... 172

Sound system ...................... 157-252

Sound system

- presetting system .................... 157

Spark plugs ................................ 263

Speedometer .............................. 56

Spray jets

- windscreen/rearscreen/headlamp .............................. 234

Starting the engine....................... 162

- ignition switch......................... 16

- starting by inertia ................... 177

- starting procedure ................... 162

- starting with an auxiliary battery .................................. 176

- switching off the engine .......... 163

- warming the engine ................ 163

Starting with an auxiliary battery.... 176

Steering system

- specifications ......................... 263

- steering wheel adjustments ...... 23

Steering lock .............................. 17

Steering wheel adjustment ........... 22

Steering wheel levers .................. 47

Stop lights (changing bulbs) ......... 194

Stopping the engine .................... 163

Sun roof

- emergency manoeuvre ............ 145

- opening-closing ....................... 144

- raising at rear ......................... 144

Sun visors .................................. 142

Symbols .................................... 6

Tailgate .................................... 145

- opening from inside ................ 146

- opening from outside .............. 8

- opening with remote control .............................. 8-146

Technical specifications ......... 258

Telephone (provision) .................. 142

Third stop light

- changing bulbs ....................... 195

Towing the car ............................ 209

Towing trailers ............................ 171

Transmission ............................... 262

Tyres

- correct reading ....................... 266

- inflation pressure .............. 231-265

- snow chains ........................... 172

- types of tyres and rims ............ 264

- winter tyres ........................... 172

Useful accessories ..................... 174

Vehicle data plates .................... 259

Vehicle exterior and under-bodywarranty ................................. 235

Vehicle identification .................... 258

Vehicle inactivity ......................... 173

- using again ............................ 174

Ventilation

- automatic two-zoneclimate control ....................... 101

Volumetric protection ................... 14

ALP

HABET

ICAL

INDEX

288

Windows

- cleaning ................................ 236

Windscreen washer

- checking fluid level and topping up ....................... 224

- “intelligent washing” function ... 50

- operation ............................... 49

- spray jets .............................. 234

Windscreen wiper

- blade replacement .................. 233- “intelligent washing” function .. 50

- operation ............................... 49

- spray jet ................................ 234

Winter

- snow chains ........................... 172

- winter tyres ..................... 172-264

289

NNOOTTEESS

290

291

292

293

294

Always ask your mechanic for®

®

The Selenia range,satisfies the most sophisticated international specifications.Highly advanced and tested technical characteristicsallow Selenia to be a lubricant able to guarantee the

maximum protection and performance of your engine.

SELENIA RACING

Iis a lubricant which is particularly suited for competition use of T urismo vehicles this lubricant is the result of the Selenia racing team's lenghtlyexperience on some of the most importantinternational circuits. It guarantees maximum protection at high temperatures

SELENIA RACING assicura inoltre:

� maximum use of power output;

� constant pressure within lubrication systemin all kinds of application;

� optimum viscosity at the highest of temperatures.

Can be used in aspirated turbochargedor multivalve petrol engines of any capacity.

For further information on Selenia products visit the web site www.flselenia.com.

The Selenia range includes Selenia 20K, Selenia 20K Alfa Romeo, Selenia Performer 5W-30 e 5W-40,Selenia Turbo Diesel, Selenia WR, Selenia Digitech.

Your car is factory filled with Selenia Racing

RIG

HT

HAN

D D

RIV

E VER

SIO

N

297

RRIIGGHHTT HHAANNDD DDRRIIVVEE VVEERRSSIIOONNThis supplement describes the main characteristics of the right hand drive version.

For any topic not specifically dealt with in this supplement, refer to the main Owner’s manual which should be thoroughly read to ensurethat the vehicle is used correctly and that the maximum performance is obtained under conditions of safety.

RIG

HT

HAN

D D

RIV

E VER

SIO

N

298

DASHBOARD

1. Side air outlets - 2. Defrosting/demisting vents for side windows - 3. Upper side vents - 4. Passanger’s Air bag - 5. Sound system -6. Engine coolant temperature gauge - 7. Clock - 8. Centre air vents - 9. Infocenter display - 10. Fuel level gauge - 11. Cruise controllever (where fitted) - 12. Outside lights control lever - 13. Speedometer. - mileage recorder - 14. Check panel - 15. Rev counter -16. Windscreen wiper control lever - 17. Bonnet opening lever - 18. Radio controls on the steering wheel (where applicable) - 19. Ig-nition switch - 20. Steering wheel lock/release lever - 21. Driver’s Air bag and horns - 22. Controls unit: instrument panel lighting adjust-ment and healamp diming - 23. Controls for heating, ventilation and climate control - 24. Ashtray and cigar lighter - 25. Hazard lights- 26. Glove box.

fig. 1A0B00463m

RIG

HT

HAN

D D

RIV

E VER

SIO

N

299

INSTRUMENT PANEL

fig. 2

A. Speedometer - B. Mileage recorder and trip meter display - C. Check panel - D. Rev counter - E. Engine coolant temperature gauge - F. Clock - G. Fuel level gauge - H. Services warning lights

A0B0403m

RIG

HT

HAN

D D

RIV

E VER

SIO

N

300

MILEAGE RECORDER WITH DOUBLE METER DISPLAY (TOTAL AND TRIP)

The display shows:

– the mileage on the first line (6 figures)

– the trip meter (4 figures).

To reset the trip meter, keep the button(A) pressed for a few seconds.

WARNING The trip meter reading is notstored if the battery is disconnected.

DASHBOARD LIGHTINGADJUSTMENT (fig. 3)

When the outside lights are on, the dash-board lighting is adjusted pressing button(B).

Each press of the button (B) cyclically se-lects one of the three lighting levels pro-vided: low-medium-high.

HEADLIGHT CORRECTOR (fig. 3)

The control (C) on the plate at the sideof the steering column can be moved to fourpositions corresponding to various vehicleloads given below.

Both headlights should be adjusted to com-pensate for vehicle loading.

Position 0: 1 or 2 people occupying frontseats, full fuel tank, on-board equipmentpresent.

Position 1: 5 people on-board.

Position 2: 5 people on-board, luggagecompartment full (50 kg approximately).

Position 3: Driver and 300 kg in luggagecompartment.

fig. 3

A0B0418m

RIG

HT

HAN

D D

RIV

E VER

SIO

N

301

SEATS

FRONT SEATS (fig. 4)

Electric adjusting seat inclination

This can be done pressing the button (B)until the desired position is reached.

Adjusting the height of thedriver’s seat

To raise the seat, pull the lever (C) tak-ing it upwards, then continue operating thelever (up and down) until reaching the re-quired height.

To lower the seat, push the lever (C)downwards, then operate the lever (up anddown) until reaching the height required.

WARNING Adjustment must only be car-ried out when seated in the driver’s seat.

Lumbar adjustment of the driver’s seat(for versions/markets where applicable)

Adjustment is done by turning the knob(D) until reaching the most comfortable po-sition.

Moving the seat backwards or forwards

Lift lever (A) and push the seat backwardsor forwards. Once you have let go of thelever, check that the seat is firmly lockedin the runners by trying to move it back andforth.

If the seat is not locked properly, in thecase of collision it might move unexpect-edly with clearly dangerous consequences.

fig. 4

A0B0459m

Adjustments may be madesolely with the car sta-

tionary.

WARNING

RIG

HT

HAN

D D

RIV

E VER

SIO

N

302

CONTROLS

AUTOMATIC FUEL CUT-OFFSWITCH (fig. 5)

This is an automatic safety switch under thepassanger’s seat which is triggered in theevent of crash to interrupt the flow of fuel.

If no leaks are found the vehicle can berestarted. Press button (A) to activate thefuel supply system.

OPENING THE BOOT (fig. 6)

To open the boot pull the lever (A) at theside of the driver’s seat.

OPENING THE FUEL FLAP (fig. 6)

The fuel flap is released from inside the carraising the front part of the lever (B).

fig. 5

A0B0327m

fig. 6

A0B0421m

If a smell of fuel is notedfollowing an accident, or

the fuel system is leaking, to avoidthe risk of fire do not reset theswitch.

WARNING

Do not operate the boot re-lease lever with the car on

the move.

WARNING

RIG

HT

HAN

D D

RIV

E VER

SIO

N

303

HEATING AND CLIMATE CONTROL

1. Central vents for demisting/defrosting the windscreen - 2. Upper adjustable side vents - 3. Vents for demisting/defrosting the side win-dows - 4. Movable side outlets - 5. Upper adjustable vent - 6. Central movable and adjustable vents - 7. Front seat floor vents - 8. Rear seatfloor vents - 9. Rear seat adjustable and movable outlets.

fig. 7A0A0361m

RIG

HT

HAN

D D

RIV

E VER

SIO

N

304

ADJUSTING THE UPPER VENT(fig. 8)

The vent is fitted with an opening/closingcontrol.

• = Completely closed.

) = Completely open.

ADJUSTING THE CENTREVENTS (fig. 9)

Each vent has a lever through which it ispossible to direct the flow of air towards thepersons horizontally.

Using the opening/closing control it is pos-sible to adjust the air flow rate of the vents.

• = Completely closed.

( = Completely open.

ADJUSTING THE SIDE VENTS(fig. 10)

At the ends of the dashboard there are ad-justable vents (A) for ventilating the pas-senger compartment and fixed vents (B) fordemisting the side windows.

To adjust the air flow of the vents turn thering (C).

• = Completely closed.

) = Completely open.

ADJUSTABLE AND MOVABLEOUTLETS

Fig. 11: Front seats (at the ends of thedashboard)

Fig. 12: Rear seats (on the console be-tween the seats)

fig. 8

A0B0458m

fig. 9

A0B0340m

fig. 10

A0B0297m

RIG

HT

HAN

D D

RIV

E VER

SIO

N

305fig. 12

A0B0289m

To adjust the air flow rate use the fins (A)pressing to open/close.

The air flow is directed by turning the out-lets using the fins.

fig. 11

A0B0299m

AIR BAG

DEACTIVATING THEPASSENGER’S AIR BAG

Should it be absolutely necessary to car-ry a child on the front seat, the passenger’sAir bag on the vehicle can be deactivated.

Deactivation takes place using the car ignition key to operate the special switch on the left hand side of the dashboard (fig. 13). Access to the switch is gainedonly with the door open.

The key-operated switch (fig. 13) hastwo positions:

1) Passenger’s Air bag activated: (ONpositionP) warning light on instrumentcluster off; it is absolutely prohibited tocarry a child on the front seat.

2) Passenger’s Air bag deactivated:

(OFF positionF) warning light on in-strument cluster on; it is possible to car-ry a child protected by special restraintsystems on the front seat.

The warning light L on the clusterstays on permanently until the passen-ger’s Air bag is reactivated.

When the door is open, the key can beinserted and removed in both positions.

fig. 13

A0B0310m

RIG

HT

HAN

D D

RIV

E VER

SIO

N

306

SELESPEED GEARBOX

Below you will find the more significantparticulars of right-hand drive versions.

WARNING As the differences are onlyformal, due to the specular position of thecontrols, as far as functioning is concerned,please refer to the descriptions given for left-hand drive versions.

Fig. 14 shows the gearshift lever withthe lay-out of the movements needed to se-lect the different gears.

Fig. 15 shows the steering wheel fittedwith two buttons on the spokes for shiftingthe gear engaged up/down.

Fig. 16 shows the position of button Afor selecting the automatic CITY mode.

fig. 14

A0B0464m

fig. 16

A0B0465m

fig. 15

A0B0411m

SERIOUS DANGER!

with a car fitted with an Air bag onthe passenger’s side, do not placea child’s seat on the front seat fac-ing backwards. In the case of need,always deactivate the passenger’sAir bag (if fitted) when a child’sseat is placed on the front seat.Even if it is not compulsory by law,for better protection of adults, youare recommended to activate theAir bag immediately as soon aschild transport is no longer neces-sary.

WARNING

RIG

HT

HAN

D D

RIV

E VER

SIO

N

307

IN THE EVENT OF ABURNT FUSE OR RELAY

FUSES IN THE MAIN FUSEBOX(fig. 17) or (fig. 18 forversions/markets whereapplicable)

The fuses for the main devices are housedin a control unit under the dashboard, to theright of the steering column.

To gain access to them, remove the pan-el (A-fig. 17 or A-fig. 18) releasing thetabs (B-fig. 17 or B-fig. 18) in the di-rection of the arrow below and unlock thescrew (C-fig. 17 or C-fig. 18).

WARNING In case of doubt, contact anAlfa Romeo Authorized Service.

fig. 17

A0B0416m

fig. 18

A0B0397m

RIG

HT

HAN

D D

RIV

E VER

SIO

N

308

The graphic symbols which distinguish themain electric component corresponding toeach fuse are given on a label (fig. 19)on the inner wall of the panel (A-fig. 17or A-fig. 18).

Some spare fuses are housed at the rightof the control unit; you are advised to re-plenish the stock of spare fuses when theyare used.

fig. 20

A0B0417m

fig. 19

A0B0185m

FUSES ABOVE THE MAINFUSEBOX

The protection fuses for some services aregrouped in three containers (fig. 20)above the main fusebox to which access isgained removing the panel (A-fig. 17 orA-fig. 18).

309

NNOOTTEESS

310

311

AFTER SALESASSISTENZA TECNICA - INGEGNERIA ASSISTENZIALEViale Alfa Romeo 20020 Arese (MI) - ItaliaFiat Auto S.p.A.Publication no. 60431344 - 5th Edition - 10/2004Printed by Satiz - Turin (Italy)All rights reserved. Reproduction, even in part is prohibited without written permissionfrom Fiat Auto S.p.A.Coordinamento Editoriale Satiz - Torino

S E R V I C E

TYRES INFLATION PRESSURE COLD (bar)

(•) Unchainable tyres.

(*) WARNING Chainable tyres; see paragraph "Snow chains" in section "Correct use of the car".Increase the specified pressure by +0.3 bar if the tyre is warm.With the tyre hot the inflating pressure should be +0.3 bar compared with the specified rating. Recheck pressure value with cold tyres.With winter tyres the inflation pressure should be +0.2 bar compared with the specified rating.

ENGINE OIL REPLACEMENT (litres)

Do not discard used oil in the environment.

REFUELLING (litres)

Only use unleaded petrol with over 95 R.O.N.

3.2 V6 24V 3.2 V6 24V Selespeed

Oil sump and filter 5.90 5.90

3.2 V6 24V 3.2 V6 24V Selespeed

Fuel tank capacity 63 63

Reserve 7 7

Reduced load (2 occupants) bar

Full load bar

Tyres 225/45 ZR17“ (•)front rear

2.5 2.3

2.8 2.6

Tyres 215/45 R17“ (*)front rear

2.4 2.4

2.6 2.6

Tyres 215/45 ZR17“ (*)front rear

2.4 2.4

2.6 2.6